AI Digital Video Recorder

User's Manual

ZHEJIANG DAHUA VISION TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. V2.3.1

 User's Manual

Foreword

General
This user’s manual (hereinafter referred to be "the Manual") introduces the installation, functions and
operations of the Digital Video Recorder (DVR) (hereinafter referred to be "the Device"). Read
carefully before using the Device, and keep the manual safe for future reference.

Safety Instructions
The following signal words might appear in the manual.
Signal Words Meaning

Indicates a high potential hazard which, if not avoided, will result in

death or serious injury.

Indicates a medium or low potential hazard which, if not avoided,

could result in slight or moderate injury.
Indicates a potential risk which, if not avoided, could result in property
damage, data loss, reductions in performance, or unpredictable
results.
Provides methods to help you solve a problem or save you time.

Provides additional information as a supplement to the text.

Revision History
Version Revision Content Release Time
V2.3.1 Updated 3G/4G/Wi-Fi connection settings. February 2023
Added DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3, DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3,
DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP, DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3, DH-
V2.3.0 XVR71xxHE-4K-I3, DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3, DH- July 2022
XVR72xxAN-4K-I3, DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3, and DH-
XVR78xxS-4K-I3.
Added the configuration of extended smart
V2.2.0 June 2022
illumination.
V2.1.0 Added DH-XVR54xxL-I3 and DH-XVR58xxS-I3. May 2022
● Added DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0).
● Added smart illumination as alarm linkage.
● Added schedule mode for AI functions.
● Added IVS mode switch.
V2.0.0 ● Added disabling event notifications in April 2022
disarming.
● Added sensitivity for IVS settings.
● Updated disk quota.
● Supports safety baseline 2.0.

I
 User's Manual

Version Revision Content Release Time

● Updated AI mode switch.
● Added intelligent diagnosis.
V1.2.1 December 2021
● Updated alarm-in port settings.
● Updated password resetting.
V1.2.0 Added some models. October 2021
V1.1.0 Added DH-XVR4232AN-I. July 2021
Added DH-XVR5816S-4KL-I2-LP and DH-XVR7816S-
V1.0.11 May 2021
4KL-X-LP-V2.
V1.0.10 Deleted the video quality analytics function. April 2021
V1.0.9 Added some models. February 2021
V1.0.8 Added some models. November 2020
V1.0.7 Added some models. September 2020
V1.0.6 Added some models. May 2020
V1.0.5 Updated to 4.0 UI version. February 2020
● Added disarm function, HDD database function,
and SMD preview function. September 2019
V1.0.4
● Optimizes Smart Search function, available to
filtering human and vehicle.
V1.0.0 First release. October 2018

Privacy Protection Notice

As the device user or data controller, you might collect the personal data of others such as their face,
fingerprints, and license plate number. You need to be in compliance with your local privacy
protection laws and regulations to protect the legitimate rights and interests of other people by
implementing measures which include but are not limited: Providing clear and visible identification
to inform people of the existence of the surveillance area and provide required contact information.

About the Manual

● The manual is for reference only. Slight differences might be found between the manual and the
product.
● We are not liable for losses incurred due to operating the product in ways that are not in
compliance with the manual.
● The manual will be updated according to the latest laws and regulations of related jurisdictions.
For detailed information, see the paper user’s manual, use our CD-ROM, scan the QR code or visit
our official website. The manual is for reference only. Slight differences might be found between
the electronic version and the paper version.
● All designs and software are subject to change without prior written notice. Product updates
might result in some differences appearing between the actual product and the manual. Please
contact customer service for the latest program and supplementary documentation.
● There might be errors in the print or deviations in the description of the functions, operations
and technical data. If there is any doubt or dispute, we reserve the right of final explanation.
● Upgrade the reader software or try other mainstream reader software if the manual (in PDF

II
 User's Manual
format) cannot be opened.
● All trademarks, registered trademarks and company names in the manual are properties of their
respective owners.
● Please visit our website, contact the supplier or customer service if any problems occur while
using the device.
● If there is any uncertainty or controversy, we reserve the right of final explanation.

III
 User's Manual

Important Safeguards and Warnings

This section introduces content covering the proper handling of the Device, hazard prevention, and
prevention of property damage. Read carefully before using the Device, and comply with the
guidelines when using it.

Transportation Requirements

Transport the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Storage Requirements

Store the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Operation Requirements

● Do not place the Device in a place exposed to sunlight or near heat sources.
● Keep the Device away from dampness, dust, and soot.
● Install the Device on a stable surface to prevent it from falling.
● Do not drop or splash liquid onto the Device, and make sure that there is no object filled with
liquid on the Device to prevent liquid from flowing into it.
● Put the Device in a well-ventilated place, and do not block its ventilation.
● Operate the Device within the rated range of power input and output.
● Do not disassemble the Device.
● Use the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Installation Requirements

● Do not connect the power adapter to the device while the adapter is powered on.
● Strictly comply with the local electric safety code and standards. Make sure the ambient voltage
is stable and meets the power supply requirements of the device.
● Do not expose the battery to environments with extremely low air pressure, or extremely high or
low temperatures. Also, it is strictly prohibited to throw the battery into a fire or furnace, and to
cut or put mechanical pressure on the battery. This is to avoid the risk of fire and explosion.
● Use the standard power adapter or cabinet power supply. We will assume no responsibility for
any injuries or damages caused by the use of a nonstandard power adapter.

● Do not place the Device in a place exposed to sunlight or near heat sources.
● Keep the Device away from dampness, dust, and soot.
● Put the Device in a well-ventilated place, and do not block its ventilation.
● Install the Device on a stable surface to prevent it from falling.

IV
 User's Manual
● The power supply must conform to the requirements of ES1 in IEC 62368-1 standard and be no
higher than PS2. Please note that the power supply requirements are subject to the device label.
● The device is a class I electrical appliance. Make sure that the power supply of the Device is
connected to a power socket with protective earthing.
● Use power cords that conform to your local requirements, and are rated specifications.
● Before connecting the power supply, make sure the input voltage matches the power
requirements of the Device.
● When installing the Device, make sure that the power plug and appliance coupler can be easily
reached to cut off power.
● Install the Device near a power socket for emergency disconnect.
● It is prohibited for non-professionals and unauthorized personnel to open the Device casing.

V
 User's Manual

Table of Contents
Foreword ........................................................................................................................................................................................................I
Important Safeguards and Warnings............................................................................................................................................ IV
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Getting Started ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Checking the Components.................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Installing HDD ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2.1 DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-
XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3/DH-
XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3/DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-
XVR82xxA-4KL-I ................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.2 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-
XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-
XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I ....................................................................................................... 7
2.2.3 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3 ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.2.4 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I/DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-
XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-
I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-
XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3.................11
2.2.5 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3 ............................................................................................................13
3 The Grand Tour ....................................................................................................................................................................................18
3.1 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................................................18
3.1.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I ..............................................................................................................................................................18
3.1.2 DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-
XVR71xxHE-4KL-I ..............................................................................................................................................................18
3.1.3 DH-XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3/DH-
XVR72xxA-4K-I3 ................................................................................................................................................................. 19
3.1.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I..........................................................................................................19
3.1.5 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR51xxH-
I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-
XVR52xxA-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-
XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3 ..............................................................19
3.1.6 DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I
.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.1.7 DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3 ........................................................................................................21

VI
 User's Manual
3.1.8 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I ...........................21
3.1.9 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP .................................................................................................. 21
3.1.10 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I ..........................................................................................................................22
3.1.11 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3 ......................................................................................................... 22
3.2 Rear Panel ....................................................................................................................................................................................23
3.2.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-
4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-
I3/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-
XVR71xxHE-4KL-I ..............................................................................................................................................................23
3.2.2 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-
4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3 .................................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.3 DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-
I3/DHXVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3/DH-
XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3................................................................26
3.2.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I..........................................................................................................27
3.2.5 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I ........................................................................28
3.2.6 DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP/DH-XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2.........................30
3.2.7 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3 .....................................................................................................................32
3.2.8 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I .............................................................................................................................35
3.2.9 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3 ............................................................................................................36
3.3 Remote Control Operations ...............................................................................................................................................36
3.4 Mouse Operations ................................................................................................................................................................... 38
4 Connection.............................................................................................................................................................................................40
4.1 Typical Connection Diagram..............................................................................................................................................40
4.2 Connecting to Video and Audio Input and Output................................................................................................. 40
4.2.1 Video Input ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
4.2.2 Video Output................................................................................................................................................................... 41
4.2.3 Audio Input ...................................................................................................................................................................... 41
4.2.4 Audio Output .................................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and Output .......................................................................................................................42
4.3.1 Introducing Alarm Port ..............................................................................................................................................42
4.3.2 Alarm Input ...................................................................................................................................................................... 43
4.3.3 Alarm Output .................................................................................................................................................................. 43
4.3.4 Alarm Output Relay Parameters ...........................................................................................................................43
5 Local Configurations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 45
5.1 Initial Settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................45
5.1.1 Booting Up ....................................................................................................................................................................... 45

VII
 User's Manual
5.1.2 Initializing the Device .................................................................................................................................................45
5.1.3 Resetting Password .....................................................................................................................................................49
5.1.3.1 Enabling Password Reset Function ...........................................................................................................49
5.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface ................................................................................................... 50
5.1.3.3 Using Reset Button on the Mainboard .................................................................................................... 56
5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard ....................................................................................................................56
5.1.4.1 Entering Startup Wizard................................................................................................................................. 56
5.1.4.2 Configuring General Settings ......................................................................................................................57
5.1.4.3 Configuring Date and Time Settings........................................................................................................59
5.1.4.4 Configuring Network Settings ....................................................................................................................60
5.1.4.5 Configuring P2P Settings...............................................................................................................................62
5.1.4.6 Configuring Encode Settings .......................................................................................................................64
5.1.4.7 Configuring Snapshot Settings ..................................................................................................................65
5.1.4.8 Configuring Basic Storage Settings ..........................................................................................................66
5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule.................................................................................67
5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule ............................................................................................70
5.2 Live View ......................................................................................................................................................................................72
5.2.1 Live View Screen............................................................................................................................................................72
5.2.2 Live View Control bar..................................................................................................................................................73
5.2.2.1 Instant Playback .................................................................................................................................................74
5.2.2.2 Digital Zoom .........................................................................................................................................................75
5.2.2.3 Instant Record .....................................................................................................................................................75
5.2.2.4 Manual Snapshot ...............................................................................................................................................76
5.2.2.5 Mute (Analog channel only) .........................................................................................................................76
5.2.2.6 Warning Light (Supported on Camera with Warning Light Function) .................................... 76
5.2.2.7 Siren (Supported on Camera with Siren Function) ...........................................................................76
5.2.2.8 Two-way Talk (Digital channel Only) ....................................................................................................... 76
5.2.2.9 Adding Camera (Digital channel Only) ................................................................................................... 76
5.2.3 Navigation Bar ...............................................................................................................................................................76
5.2.4 Shortcut Menu................................................................................................................................................................77
5.2.5 AI Preview Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................79
5.2.6 Channel Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................81
5.2.7 Color Setting ................................................................................................................................................................... 83
5.2.8 Live View Display ..........................................................................................................................................................85
5.2.8.1 Configuring Display Settings .......................................................................................................................85
5.2.8.2 Configuring Zero-Channel Settings .........................................................................................................88
5.2.8.3 Configuring TV ....................................................................................................................................................89

VIII
 User's Manual
5.2.9 Configuring Tour Settings ........................................................................................................................................89
5.2.10 Quick Operation Bar .................................................................................................................................................91
5.3 Entering Main Menu ...............................................................................................................................................................93
5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras .....................................................................................................................................................96
5.4.1 Configuring PTZ Connection Settings................................................................................................................96
5.4.2 Working with PTZ Control Panel ...........................................................................................................................98
5.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions ................................................................................................................................... 100
5.4.3.1 Configuring Presets ....................................................................................................................................... 100
5.4.3.2 Configuring Tours........................................................................................................................................... 100
5.4.3.3 Configuring Patterns..................................................................................................................................... 101
5.4.3.4 Configuring Scan............................................................................................................................................. 102
5.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 103
5.4.4.1 Calling Presets .................................................................................................................................................. 103
5.4.4.2 Calling Tours...................................................................................................................................................... 103
5.4.4.3 Calling Patterns ............................................................................................................................................... 103
5.4.4.4 Calling Auto Scan ............................................................................................................................................ 103
5.4.4.5 Calling Auto Pan .............................................................................................................................................. 104
5.4.4.6 Using AUX Button ........................................................................................................................................... 104
5.4.5 Calling OSD Menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 104
5.5 Configuring Camera Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 105
5.5.1 Configuring Image Settings ................................................................................................................................. 105
5.5.2 Configuring Encode Settings ............................................................................................................................... 109
5.5.3 Configuring Snapshot Settings .......................................................................................................................... 111
5.5.4 Configuring Encode Enhancement ................................................................................................................... 113
5.5.5 Configuring Overlay Settings .............................................................................................................................. 114
5.5.6 Configuring Covered Area Settings.................................................................................................................. 115
5.5.7 Configuring Channel Type .................................................................................................................................... 116
5.5.8 Upgrading Coaxial Camera ................................................................................................................................... 117
5.6 Configuring Remote Devices .......................................................................................................................................... 118
5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices ......................................................................................................................................... 118
5.6.1.1 Initializing Remote Devices ....................................................................................................................... 119
5.6.1.2 Adding Remote Devices Automatically ............................................................................................... 125
5.6.1.3 Adding Remote Devices Manually ......................................................................................................... 126
5.6.1.4 Modifying or Deleting Remote Devices ............................................................................................... 128
5.6.1.5 Modifying IP Address .................................................................................................................................... 129
5.6.1.6 Exporting IP Address..................................................................................................................................... 131
5.6.1.7 Importing IP Address .................................................................................................................................... 132

IX
 User's Manual
5.6.2 Managing Remote Devices ................................................................................................................................... 133
5.6.2.1 Viewing Status.................................................................................................................................................. 133
5.6.2.2 Viewing Firmware Information................................................................................................................ 134
5.6.2.3 Upgrading Remote Devices ....................................................................................................................... 134
5.7 Configuring Record Settings........................................................................................................................................... 136
5.7.1 Enabling Record Control ........................................................................................................................................ 136
5.7.2 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule......................................................................................... 137
5.8 Configuring Snapshot Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 137
5.8.1 Configuring Snapshot Trigger ............................................................................................................................ 137
5.8.1.1 Configuring Scheduled Snapshot........................................................................................................... 137
5.8.1.2 Configuring Event Triggered Snapshot............................................................................................... 138
5.8.2 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule ...................................................................................................... 139
5.8.3 Backing up Snapshots to FTP............................................................................................................................... 140
5.9 Playing Back Video .............................................................................................................................................................. 140
5.9.1 Enabling Record Control ........................................................................................................................................ 140
5.9.2 Instant Playback ......................................................................................................................................................... 141
5.9.3 Video Playback............................................................................................................................................................ 142
5.9.3.1 Introducing Playback Controls Bar ........................................................................................................ 144
5.9.3.2 Selecting Search Type................................................................................................................................... 145
5.9.3.3 Clipping Recorded Video ............................................................................................................................ 146
5.9.3.4 Backing up Recorded Video ...................................................................................................................... 146
5.9.4 Smart Search ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
5.9.5 Showing AI Rule during Playback...................................................................................................................... 148
5.9.6 Marking and Playing Back Video ....................................................................................................................... 149
5.9.7 Playing Back Snapshots.......................................................................................................................................... 151
5.9.8 Playing Back Splices ................................................................................................................................................. 152
5.9.9 Using the File List....................................................................................................................................................... 152
5.10 Alarm Events Settings...................................................................................................................................................... 154
5.10.1 Alarm Information .................................................................................................................................................. 154
5.10.2 Alarm Input Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 155
5.10.2.1 Configuring Local Alarms......................................................................................................................... 155
5.10.2.2 Configuring Alarms from Alarm Box .................................................................................................. 158
5.10.2.3 Configuring Alarms from External IP Cameras ............................................................................. 159
5.10.2.4 Configuring Alarms for IP Camera Offline ....................................................................................... 160
5.10.2.5 Configuring Alarms from HDCVI Devices......................................................................................... 161
5.10.3 Alarm Output Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 162
5.10.3.1 Configuring Alarm Output ...................................................................................................................... 162

X
 User's Manual
5.10.3.2 Configuring Warning Light ..................................................................................................................... 163
5.10.3.3 Configuring Siren ......................................................................................................................................... 164
5.10.3.4 Configuring Smart Illumination............................................................................................................ 166
5.10.4 Video Detection ....................................................................................................................................................... 167
5.10.4.1 Configuring Motion Detection Settings ........................................................................................... 167
5.10.4.1.1 Setting the Motion Detection Region ..................................................................................... 169
5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period .............................................................................................. 170
5.10.4.2 Configuring Video Loss Settings .......................................................................................................... 171
5.10.4.3 Configuring Tampering Settings.......................................................................................................... 172
5.10.5 System Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
5.10.5.1 Configuring HDD Event Settings .......................................................................................................... 173
5.10.5.2 Configuring Network Event Settings ................................................................................................. 175
5.10.6 Configuring Disarming......................................................................................................................................... 176
5.11 AI Function ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
5.11.1 Configuring AI Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 177
5.11.2 For Pro AI Series ....................................................................................................................................................... 178
5.11.2.1 Face Detection ............................................................................................................................................... 178
5.11.2.1.1 Configuring Face Detection Parameters ............................................................................... 179
5.11.2.1.2 Searching for and Playing Detected Faces ........................................................................... 181
5.11.2.2 Face Recognition .......................................................................................................................................... 184
5.11.2.2.1 Creating a Face Database .............................................................................................................. 184
5.11.2.2.2 Adding Face Pictures ....................................................................................................................... 186
5.11.2.2.3 Face Recognition Configuration ................................................................................................ 193
5.11.2.2.4 Smart Search for Face Recognition .......................................................................................... 195
5.11.2.3 IVS Function .................................................................................................................................................... 204
5.11.2.3.1 Configuring IVS Parameters ........................................................................................................ 204
5.11.2.3.2 Configuring Tripwire Rules .......................................................................................................... 205
5.11.2.3.3 Configuring Intrusion Rules......................................................................................................... 209
5.11.2.3.4 Smart Search for IVS Function .................................................................................................... 211
5.11.2.4 Video Structuring......................................................................................................................................... 213
5.11.2.4.1 Configuring Video Structuring ................................................................................................... 213
5.11.2.4.2 Smart Search for Video Structuring ......................................................................................... 214
5.11.3 For Lite AI Series ...................................................................................................................................................... 216
5.11.3.1 SMD ..................................................................................................................................................................... 217
5.11.3.1.1 Configuring SMD Parameters ..................................................................................................... 217
5.11.3.1.2 Searching for SMD Reports .......................................................................................................... 219
5.11.3.2 Configuring IVS Function ......................................................................................................................... 220

XI
 User's Manual
5.11.3.2.1 Configuring IVS Parameters ........................................................................................................ 220
5.11.3.2.2 Smart Search for IVS Function .................................................................................................... 221
5.11.3.3 Face Detection (For XVR5X-I and XVR7X-I series only) ............................................................. 223
5.11.3.4 Face Recognition (For XVR7X-I series only) .................................................................................... 223
5.11.4 Configuring IVS Mode........................................................................................................................................... 223
5.11.5 Configuring Smart Schedule ............................................................................................................................. 224
5.12 IoT Function .......................................................................................................................................................................... 226
5.12.1 Configuring Sensor Settings ............................................................................................................................. 226
5.12.1.1 Connecting Sensor through Device .................................................................................................... 226
5.12.1.2 Connecting Sensor through Camera with Gateway ................................................................... 228
5.12.1.3 Configuring Alarm Linkage ..................................................................................................................... 231
5.12.2 Configuring Temperature and Humidity Camera................................................................................... 234
5.12.2.1 Enabling Detecting Function ................................................................................................................. 234
5.12.2.2 Viewing Temperature and Humidity Data ...................................................................................... 235
5.12.2.3 Exporting Temperature and Humidity Data................................................................................... 236
5.12.2.4 Configuring Alarm Linkage ..................................................................................................................... 237
5.12.2.4.1 Configuring Alarm Linkage for Temperature Data .......................................................... 237
5.12.2.4.2 Configuring Alarm Settings for Humidity Data ................................................................. 240
5.12.2.5 Searching IoT Information....................................................................................................................... 243
5.12.3 Configuring Wireless Siren................................................................................................................................. 245
5.13 POS ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 246
5.13.1 Searching the Transaction Records ............................................................................................................... 246
5.13.2 Configuring POS Settings ................................................................................................................................... 247
5.14 Configuring Backup Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 249
5.14.1 Finding USB Device ................................................................................................................................................ 249
5.14.2 Backing up Files ....................................................................................................................................................... 250
5.15 Network Management .................................................................................................................................................... 252
5.15.1 Configuring Network Settings.......................................................................................................................... 252
5.15.1.1 Configuring TCP/IP Settings ................................................................................................................... 252
5.15.1.2 Configuring Port Settings ........................................................................................................................ 252
5.15.1.3 Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settings ............................................................................................ 253
5.15.1.4 Configuring 3G/4G Settings.................................................................................................................... 255
5.15.1.4.1 Through the Wireless 3G/4G Module ...................................................................................... 255
5.15.1.4.2 Through the External Drive.......................................................................................................... 257
5.15.1.5 Configuring PPPoE Settings ................................................................................................................... 258
5.15.1.6 Configuring DDNS Settings..................................................................................................................... 259
5.15.1.7 Configuring Email Settings ..................................................................................................................... 261

XII
 User's Manual
5.15.1.8 Configuring UPnP Settings ..................................................................................................................... 262
5.15.1.9 Configuring SNMP Settings .................................................................................................................... 264
5.15.1.10 Configuring Multicast Settings .......................................................................................................... 266
5.15.1.11 Configuring Register Settings............................................................................................................. 267
5.15.1.12 Configuring Alarm Center Settings .................................................................................................. 268
5.15.1.13 Configuring P2P Settings ...................................................................................................................... 269
5.15.2 Configuring Network Testing Settings ........................................................................................................ 269
5.15.2.1 Testing the Network ................................................................................................................................... 269
5.15.2.2 Capturing Packet and Backing up ....................................................................................................... 270
5.16 Configuring Account Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 272
5.16.1 Configuring User Account .................................................................................................................................. 273
5.16.1.1 Adding a User Account .............................................................................................................................. 273
5.16.1.2 Modifying a User Account........................................................................................................................ 276
5.16.1.3 Deleting a User Account ........................................................................................................................... 277
5.16.2 Configuring Group Account............................................................................................................................... 278
5.16.2.1 Adding a Group ............................................................................................................................................. 278
5.16.2.2 Modifying a Group....................................................................................................................................... 280
5.16.2.3 Deleting a Group .......................................................................................................................................... 281
5.16.3 Configuring ONVIF Users .................................................................................................................................... 281
5.17 Audio Management .......................................................................................................................................................... 282
5.17.1 Configuring Audio Files ....................................................................................................................................... 283
5.17.2 Configuring Playing Schedule for Audio Files.......................................................................................... 284
5.18 Storage Management ...................................................................................................................................................... 285
5.18.1 Configuring Basic Settings ................................................................................................................................. 285
5.18.2 Configuring the Recording and Snapshot Schedule ............................................................................. 286
5.18.3 Configuring Disk Manager ................................................................................................................................. 286
5.18.4 Configuring Record ................................................................................................................................................ 287
5.18.5 Configuring Advance Settings ......................................................................................................................... 287
5.18.6 Configuring Disk Quota ....................................................................................................................................... 289
5.18.7 Configuring HDD Detecting Settings ............................................................................................................ 292
5.18.7.1 Checking HDD ................................................................................................................................................ 292
5.18.7.2 View Detecting Results.............................................................................................................................. 293
5.18.8 Configuring Record Estimate ............................................................................................................................ 294
5.18.9 Configuring FTP Storage Settings .................................................................................................................. 296
5.19 Security Center .................................................................................................................................................................... 298
5.19.1 Security Status .......................................................................................................................................................... 298
5.19.2 System Service.......................................................................................................................................................... 299

XIII
 User's Manual
5.19.2.1 Basic Services ................................................................................................................................................. 299
5.19.2.2 802.1x................................................................................................................................................................. 301
5.19.2.3 HTTPS ................................................................................................................................................................. 302
5.19.3 Attack Defense ......................................................................................................................................................... 303
5.19.3.1 Firewall .............................................................................................................................................................. 303
5.19.3.2 Account Lockout ........................................................................................................................................... 303
5.19.3.3 Anti-Dos Attack ............................................................................................................................................. 304
5.19.3.4 Sync Time-Allowlist ..................................................................................................................................... 304
5.19.4 CA Certificate............................................................................................................................................................. 305
5.19.4.1 Device Certificate ......................................................................................................................................... 305
5.19.4.2 Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................................................................ 308
5.19.5 Audio/Video Encryption ...................................................................................................................................... 308
5.19.6 Security Warning ..................................................................................................................................................... 310
5.19.6.1 Security Exception ....................................................................................................................................... 310
5.19.6.2 Illegal Login..................................................................................................................................................... 311
5.20 Configuring System Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 312
5.20.1 Configuring General System Settings .......................................................................................................... 312
5.20.2 Configuring RS-232 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 314
5.20.3 Configuring System Maintenance Settings ............................................................................................... 315
5.20.4 Exporting and Importing System Settings ................................................................................................. 316
5.20.5 Restoring Default Settings ................................................................................................................................. 318
5.20.6 Updating the Device .............................................................................................................................................. 319
5.20.6.1 Updating File .................................................................................................................................................. 319
5.20.6.2 Performing Online Upgrade ................................................................................................................... 320
5.20.6.3 Uboot Upgrading ......................................................................................................................................... 321
5.20.7 Exporting Intelligent Diagnosis Data ........................................................................................................... 321
5.21 Viewing Information ........................................................................................................................................................ 322
5.21.1 Viewing Version Details ....................................................................................................................................... 322
5.21.2 Viewing Log Information .................................................................................................................................... 322
5.21.3 Viewing Event Information ................................................................................................................................ 324
5.21.4 Viewing Network Information.......................................................................................................................... 324
5.21.4.1 Viewing Online Users ................................................................................................................................. 324
5.21.4.2 Viewing the Network Load ...................................................................................................................... 325
5.21.5 Viewing HDD Information .................................................................................................................................. 326
5.21.6 Viewing Channel Information .......................................................................................................................... 327
5.21.7 Viewing Data Stream Information.................................................................................................................. 328
5.22 Logging out of the Device ............................................................................................................................................. 329

XIV
 User's Manual
6 Web Operations................................................................................................................................................................................ 330
6.1 Connecting to Network...................................................................................................................................................... 330
6.2 Logging in to the Web Interface.................................................................................................................................... 330
6.3 Introducing Web Main Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 331
6.4 Viewing Open-source Software Notice...................................................................................................................... 333
7 FAQ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 335
Appendix 1 Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................................... 341
Appendix 2 HDD Capacity Calculation ..................................................................................................................................... 343
Appendix 3 Compatible Backup Devices ................................................................................................................................ 344
Appendix 3.1 Compatible USB List...................................................................................................................................... 344
Appendix 3.2 Compatible SD Card List ............................................................................................................................. 345
Appendix 3.3 Compatible Portable HDD List ................................................................................................................. 345
Appendix 3.4 Compatible USB DVD List ........................................................................................................................... 346
Appendix 3.5 Compatible SATA DVD List ........................................................................................................................ 346
Appendix 3.6 Compatible SATA HDD List ........................................................................................................................ 346
Appendix 4 Compatible CD/DVD Burner List ........................................................................................................................ 353
Appendix 5 Compatible Displayer List ..................................................................................................................................... 354
Appendix 6 Compatible Switcher ............................................................................................................................................... 355
Appendix 7 Earthing .......................................................................................................................................................................... 356
Appendix 7.1 What is the Surge ............................................................................................................................................ 356
Appendix 7.2 The Earthing Modes ...................................................................................................................................... 357
Appendix 7.3 Thunder Proof Ground Method in the Monitor System .............................................................. 358
Appendix 7.4 The Shortcut Way to Check the Electric System by Digital Multimeter............................... 359
Appendix 8 RJ45-RS232 Connection Cable Definition ..................................................................................................... 363
Appendix 9 Cybersecurity Recommendations ..................................................................................................................... 365

XV
 User's Manual

1 Introduction

1.1 Overview
The Device is an excellent digital monitor product for security industry. The embedded LINUX OS
assures the stable operation. The H.265 and G.711 technologies assure the high quality image and
low bit stream. The frame-by-frame play function displays more details for analysis, and provides the
functions such as record, playback, and monitor and assures the synchronization for audio and
video. The Device also adopts the advanced control technology and great network data
transmission capability.
The Device adopts embedded design to achieve high security and reliability. It can work in the local
end and, with strong networking capability it can get connected to the professional surveillance
software (Smart PSS) to form a security network to show its powerful remote monitoring function.
The Device is applicable to the areas such as bank, telecom, electricity, traffic, intelligent residential
district, factory, warehouse, resources, and water conservancy facilities.

1.2 Functions

The functions might be different depending on the software and hardware versions of the model
you purchased.

AI Function
● Support face detection that analyzes the attributes such as age, gender, glasses, beard, mask, and
then make structured of these data to store for quick search.
● Support face recognition that compares the captured face snapshot with the face database and
link the configured alarms (face detection should be enabled).
● Support searching by picture that is convenient for finding the target picture from database.
● Support 16 channel IVS function that includes tripwire and intrusion detection. The IVS function
can avoid wrong alarms by filtering the factors such as rains, light, and animals.
● Calculate the quantity of detected humans within 24 hours.
● Detect the vehicles passing by within 24 hours.

Real-time Surveillance
● Support VGA port and HDMI port to realize the surveillance through monitors.
● Support HDMI, VGA, and TV output at the same time.

IoT Management
Provide specific management module for IoT features including humidity and temperature data
reports and alarms linkage.

1
 User's Manual

Sensor Integration
Integrate coaxial cameras with diverse array of sensors such as temperature, humidity and wireless
alarm devices.

Storage Management
● Special data format to guarantee data security and avoid the risk of modifying data viciously.
● Support digital watermark.

Compression Format
Support multiple-channel audio and video signal. An independent hardware decodes the audio and
video signal from each channel to maintain video and audio synchronization.

Backup Function
● Support backup operation through USB port (such as USB storage disk, portable HDD, and
burner).
● Client-end user can download the file from local HDD through network to backup.

Record & Playback

● Support each channel real-time record independently, and simultaneously support the functions
such as search, backward play, network monitor, record search, and download.
● Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame by frame play.
● Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred time.
● Support zooming in the selected area in the live view.

Network Operation
Support network remote real-time monitor, remote record search and remote PTZ control.

Alarm Activation
● Several relay alarm outputs to realize alarm activation and on-site light control.
● The alarm input port and output port have the protection circuit to guarantee the Device safety.

Communication Port
● RS-485 port can realize alarm input and PTZ control.
● RS-232 port can connect to keyboard, COM port of PC or the matrix control.
● Standard Ethernet port can realize network remote access function.
● The dual-network port has the multi-address, fault tolerance, load balance setup mode.

PTZ Control
Support PTZ decoder through RS-485 port.

Intelligent Operation
● Support mouse operation function.
● Support "copy and paste" function for the same settings.

2
 User's Manual

UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)

Establish mapping connection between LAN and WAN through UPnP protocol.

Camera Self-adaptive
Auto-recognize and work with the PAL or NTSC camera and HD camera.

3
 User's Manual

2 Getting Started

2.1 Checking the Components

The actual appearance, component, or quantity might be different depending on the model you
purchased.
When you receive the Device, please check against the following checking list. If any of the items are
missing or damaged, contact the local retailer or after-sales engineer immediately.

Table 2-1 Checking list

No. Checking Items Requirements
Appearance No obvious damage.

1 Package No broken or distorted

Packing materials positions that could be caused
by hit.
Not torn up.

Do not tear up or throw away

the labels; otherwise the
2 Labels Labels on the device warranty services are not
ensured. You need to provide
the serial number of the
product when you call the
after-sales service.

Appearance No obvious damage.

3 Device Data cables, power

cables, fan cables, No connection loose.
mainboard

2.2 Installing HDD

Please check whether the HDD is already installed in the Device when you first time using the
Device. We recommend you use the HDD recommended officially. Do not use the PC HDD.

Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you open the case to replace the
HDD.

2.2.1 DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR52xxA-
I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-

4
 User's Manual

I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-
I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-
I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-
I3/DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws to take off the cover.

Figure 2-1 Remove screws

Step 2 Put two screws on the HDD and twist one turn.

Figure 2-2 Put screws

Step 3 Align the two screws with the holes on the device.

5
 User's Manual
Figure 2-3 Align screws

Step 4 Turn the device and put in the other two screws, and then fasten all screws to fix the HDD
to the device.

Figure 2-4 Fasten screws

Step 5 Use power cable and data cable to connect the device and HDD.

Figure 2-5 Connect cables

Step 6 Put back the cover and fasten the screws.

6
 User's Manual
Figure 2-6 Put back cover

2.2.2 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-
LP/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-
LP/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-XVR78xxS-4KL-X-
LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws from the chassis.

Figure 2-7 Remove screws

Step 2 Take off the cover of the chassis.

Figure 2-8 Take off cover

Step 3 Remove the screws from the drive bracket to take it off.

7
 User's Manual
Figure 2-9 Take off drive bracket

Step 4 Align the four screw holes on the disk to those on the drive bracket and fix the disk on the
bracket.

Figure 2-10 Fix disk

Step 5 Fix other disks on the bracket as needed.

Figure 2-11 Fix other disks

Step 6 Fix the two drive brackets.

This is only need on models with 8 bays.

Figure 2-12 Fix drive brackets

Step 7 Put the drive brackets back and fix them in the DVR.

8
 User's Manual
Figure 2-13 Put back drive bracket

Step 8 Connect the disks and the DVR with power cable and data cable.

The following figure shows the connection of 4-bay model for example.

Figure 2-14 Connect cables

Step 9 Put the cover back and fasten the screws.

Figure 2-15 Put back cover

2.2.3 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-
XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the fixing screws on the rear panel.

Figure 2-16 Remove screws

9
 User's Manual
Step 2 Remove the cover along the direction shown in the following arrow.

Figure 2-17 Remove cover

Step 3 Remove the screws on the sides of HDD bracket to take out the bracket.

Figure 2-18 Remove bracket

Step 4 Match the four screw holes on the HDD with the four holes on the bracket and then fasten
the screws. The HDD is fixed to the bracket.

Figure 2-19 Fix HDD

Step 5 Install the other HDDs.

Figure 2-20 Install other HDDs

Step 6 Place the bracket to the device and then fasten the screws on the sides of the bracket.

Figure 2-21 Fasten screws

10
 User's Manual
Step 7 Connect the HDD data cable and power cable to the device.

Figure 2-22 Connect cables

Step 8 Put back the cover and fasten the screws on the rear panel to complete the installation.

Figure 2-23 Put back cover

2.2.4 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I/DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-
XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-
I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-
I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-
I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-
I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-
I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-
I3
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws on the cover.

11
 User's Manual
Figure 2-24 Remove screws

Step 2 Remove the cover.

Figure 2-25 Remove cover

Step 3 Align the screws of the HDD with the holes on the back of the device and fasten them.

Figure 2-26 Fasten screws

Step 4 Connect the HDD cable and the power cable to the mainboard.

12
 User's Manual
Figure 2-27 Connect cables

Step 5 Put back the cover.

Figure 2-28 Put back cover

Step 6 Fasten the screws.

Figure 2-29 Fasten screws

2.2.5 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws.

13
 User's Manual
Figure 2-30 Remove screws

Step 2 Remove the cover.

Figure 2-31 Remove cover

Step 3 Align the screws of the HDD with the holes on the DVR and fasten them.

14
 User's Manual
Figure 2-32 Install HDD

Step 4 Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.

15
 User's Manual
Figure 2-33 Connect cables

Step 5 Put back the cover.

Figure 2-34 Put back cover

Step 6 Fasten the screws.

16
 User's Manual
Figure 2-35 Fasten screws

17
 User's Manual

3 The Grand Tour

This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations.

3.1 Front Panel

3.1.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I
Figure 3-1 Front panel

Table 3-1 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 HDD Glows blue when HDD status is abnormal.
2 NET Glows blue when network status is abnormal.
Glows blue when the power is connected
3 POWER
properly.
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB
4 USB port
storage device, keyboard, and mouse.

3.1.2 DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-
I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I
Figure 3-2 Front panel

Table 3-2 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
1 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.

18
 User's Manual

3.1.3 DH-XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-
I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3
Figure 3-3 Front panel

Table 3-3 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
2 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.

3.1.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I
Figure 3-4 Front panel

Table 3-4 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
1 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.
2 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.

3.1.5 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-
XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-
XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-

19
 User's Manual

XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-
XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3
Figure 3-5 Front panel

Table 3-5 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 HDD Glows when HDD status is abnormal.
2 NET Glows when network status is abnormal.
3 POWER Glows when the power is connected properly.
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
4 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.

3.1.6 DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-XVR78xxS-4KL-
X-LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I
Figure 3-6 Front panel

Table 3-6 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
2 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.

20
 User's Manual

3.1.7 DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3
Figure 3-7 Front panel

Table 3-7 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
2 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.

3.1.8 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-
XVR54xxL-4KL-I
Figure 3-8 Front panel

Table 3-8 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
1 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.

3.1.9 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-

21
 User's Manual

XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP
Figure 3-9 Front panel

Table 3-9 Front panel description

No. Port Name Function
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
1 USB port
device, keyboard, and mouse.

3.1.10 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I
Figure 3-10 Front panel

3.1.11 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3
Figure 3-11 Front panel

22
 User's Manual
Table 3-10 Front panel description
Icon Name Function
● The indicator is off when the HDD is running
normally.
HDD status indicator
● The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in
malfunction.
● The indicator is off when the power is connected
abnormally.
Power status indicator
● The indicator glows blue when the power is
connected normally.
● The indicator is off when the network connection
is correct.
Network status indicator
● The indicator glows blue when the network
connection is abnormal.

3.2 Rear Panel

3.2.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-
XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-
XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I
Figure 3-12 Rear panel

23
 User's Manual
Table 3-11 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
Four groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port
1 to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3:
port 9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16).
These ports receive the signal from the external
alarm source. There are two types: NO
Alarm input port 1–16 (Normally Open) and NC (Normally Closed).

When your alarm input device is using external

power, please make sure the alarm input
device and the Device have the same ground.
1
● Three groups of alarm output ports (Group
1: port NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2,
Group 3: port NO3–C3). These ports output
Alarm output port 1–3 (NO1– alarm signal to the alarm device. Please
NO3; C1–C3) make sure power supply to the external
alarm device.
● NO: Normally open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.

Ground.

Connects to analog camera to input video

2 Video input port
signal.
Receives audio signal output from the devices
3 Audio input port such as microphone. It corresponds to video
input port 1.
Connects to the audio splitter taken from the
package to convert to audio input port which
4 DB25 port receives the audio signal from devices such as
microphone. It corresponds to video input
ports 2–16.
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the
5 Audio output port
sound box.
High definition audio and video signal output
port.
6 HDMI port The port outputs the uncompressed high
definition video and multi-channel audio data
to the connected display with HDMI port.
Connects to external devices such as USB
7 USB port
storage device, keyboard and mouse.
8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
Connects to the control devices such as speed
dome PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the
9 RS-485 communication port
cable A and RS-485_B is connected to the cable
B.

24
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

10 Power input port Inputs 12 VDC power.
Outputs analog video data to the connected
11 VGA port
display with VGA port.
12 Power button Turns on/off the DVR.
Use a cable tie to secure the power cable on the
13 Power cable fastener
DVR to prevent loss.

14 Ground terminal.

3.2.2 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3
Figure 3-13 Rear panel

Table 3-12 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
Receives audio signal output from the devices such as
2 Audio input port
microphone.
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound
3 Audio output port
box.
High definition audio and video signal output port.
4 HDMI port The port outputs the uncompressed high definition
video and multi-channel audio data to the connected
display with HDMI port.
5 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
Connects to the control devices such as speed dome
RS-485
6 PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A and
communication port
RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.
Outputs analog video data to the connected display
7 VGA port
with VGA port.
Connects to external devices such as USB storage
8 USB port
device, keyboard and mouse.
9 Power input port Inputs 12 VDC power.
Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR in
10 Power cable fastener
case there is any loss.

25
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

11 Ground terminal.

3.2.3 DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-
XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DHXVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-
XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3/DH-
XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3
Figure 3-14 Rear panel

Table 3-13 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function

1 Ground terminal.

Four groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to

port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port
12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive
the signal from the external alarm source. There are
two types: NO (Normally Open) and NC (Normally
Alarm input port 1–16 Closed).

When your alarm input device is using external power,

please make sure the alarm input device and the DVR
connect to the same ground.
2
● Three groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port
NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port
NO3–C3). These ports output alarm signal to the
Alarm output port 1–3
alarm device. Please make sure power supply to
(NO1–NO3;C1–C3)
the external alarm device.
● NO: Normally open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.

Ground.

3 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.

26
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

Receives audio signal output from the devices such as
4 Audio input port
microphone.
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound
5 Audio output port
box.
High definition audio and video signal output port.
6 HDMI port The port outputs the uncompressed high definition
video and multi-channel audio data to the connected
display with HDMI port.
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
7 USB port
mouse, and USB storage device.
8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
Connects to the control devices such as speed dome
RS-485 communication
9 PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A and
port
RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.
10 Power input port Inputs 12 VDC power.
Outputs analog video data to the connected display
11 VGA port
with VGA port.
12 Power button Turns on/off the DVR.
Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR in
13 Power cable fastener
case there is any loss.

3.2.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I
Figure 3-15 Rear panel

Table 3-14 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the
2 Audio output port
sound box.
Two-way talk input port which receives analog
3 MIC IN audio signal output from the devices such as
microphone and pickup.
Receives audio signal output from the devices such
4 Audio input port
as microphone.

27
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

The port is used for general COM debug to
5 RS-232 debug COM configure IP address or transfer transparent COM
data.
4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to
port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to
port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports
receive the signal from the external alarm source.
There are two types: NO (normal open) and NC
Alarm input port 1–16 (normal close).
6
When your alarm input device is using external
power, please make sure the input device and the
DVR connect to the same ground.

Ground terminal.
Outputs analog video data to the connected
7 VGA port
display with VGA port.
8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
High definition audio and video signal output port.
9 HDMI port The port outputs the uncompressed high definition
video and multi-channel audio data to the
connected display with HDMI port.
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
10 USB port
mouse, and USB storage device.
11 Power input port Inputs power.
● 5 groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port
NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port
NO3–C3, Group 4：port NO4–C4, Group 5: port
NO5, C5, NC5). These ports output alarm signal
Alarm output port 1–5
12 to the alarm device. Please make sure power
(NO1–NO5; C1–C5; NC5)
supply to the external alarm device.
● NO: Normal open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
● NC: Normal close alarm output port.
13 Power button Turns on/off the DVR.

14 Ground.

3.2.5 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-
XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-

28
 User's Manual

XVR88xxS-4KL-I
Figure 3-16 Rear panel

Table 3-15 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 GND Ground.
2 Power input port Inputs power.
3 Power button Turns on/off the Device.
Receives the analog audio signal output from the
4 Audio input port
devices such as microphone.
Two-way talk input port which receives the analog
5 Audio input port (MIC IN) audio signal output from the devices such as
microphone, pickup.
Audio output port (MIC Two-way talk output port which outputs the analog
6
OUT) audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
Outputs the analog audio signal to the devices such as
7 Audio output port
the sound box.
8 Video output port Connect to video output devices such as TV.
● Four groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port 1
to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9
to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports
receive the signal from the external alarm source.
9 Alarm input port 1–16 There are two types; NO (Normally Open) and NC
(Normally Closed).
● When your alarm input device is using external
power, please make sure the device and the DVR
have the same ground.

29
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

● Five groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port
NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port
NO3–C3, Group 4：port NO4–C4, Group 5: port
NO5, C5, NC5). These ports output alarm signal to
Alarm output port 1–5
the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to
(NO1–NO5; C1–C5; NC5)
the external alarm device.
● NO: Normally open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
● NC: Normally closed alarm output port.
You can connect to the control devices such as speed
RS-485 communication
dome PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A
port
and RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.
Four-wire full-duplex RS- Four-wire full-duplex 485 port. T+ and T- is the output
485 port (T+, T-, R+, R-) wire; R+ and R- is the input wire.
Control power output Controls 12 VDC power output. It is to control the on-off
(CTRL 12V) alarm relay output.
Provides power to external devices such as camera and
12V power output port alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be
below 1A.
Ground.

10 Video input port Connect to analog camera to input video signal.

11 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the
12 VGA video output
monitor to view analog video.
It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or
13 RS-232 debug COM
transfer transparent COM data.
High definition audio and video signal output port. It
outputs the same video source as VGA. It supports 4K
resolution output and supports mouse operation and
14 HDMI port control.
Please note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the
VGA output stops.
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
15 USB port
mouse, and USB storage device.
External SATA port which connects to the device with
16 eSATA port SATA port. Perform the jumper configuration when
connecting HDD.

3.2.6 DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP/DH-

30
 User's Manual

XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2
Figure 3-17 Rear panel

Table 3-16 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function
Outputs the analog audio signal to the devices such as
1 Audio output port
the sound box.
2 Video output port Connect to video output devices such as TV.
Two-way talk input port which receives the analog
3 Audio input port (MIC IN) audio signal output from the devices such as
microphone, pickup.
Audio output port (MIC Two-way talk output port which outputs the analog
4
OUT) audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
Receives the analog audio signal output from the
5 Audio input port
devices such as microphone.
● Four groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port 1
to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9
to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports
receive the signal from the external alarm source.
Alarm input port 1–16 There are two types; NO (Normally Open) and NC
(Normally Closed).
● When your alarm input device is using external
power, please make sure the device and the DVR
have the same ground.
● Five groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port
6 NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port
NO3–C3, Group 4：port NO4–C4, Group 5: port
NO5, C5, NC5). These ports output alarm signal to
Alarm output port 1–5
the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to
(NO1–NO5; C1–C5; NC5)
the external alarm device.
● NO: Normally open alarm output port.
● C: Alarm output public end.
● NC: Normally closed alarm output port.
You can connect to the control devices such as speed
RS-485 communication
dome PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A
port
and RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.

31
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

Four-wire full-duplex RS- Four-wire full-duplex 485 port. T+ and T- is the output
485 port (T+, T-, R+, R-) wire; R+ and R- is the input wire.
Control power output Controls 12 VDC power output. It is to control the on-off
(CTRL 12V) alarm relay output.
Provides power to external devices such as camera and
12V power output port alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be
below 1A.
G Ground.
It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or
7 RS-232 debug COM
transfer transparent COM data.
Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the
8 VGA video output
monitor to view analog video.
9 Power button Turns on/off the Device.
10 Power input port Inputs power.
Outputs the video signal of the corresponding video
11 Loop out
input port.
12 Video input port Connect to analog camera to input video signal.
13 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
14 USB port
mouse, and USB storage device.
External SATA port which connects to the device with
15 eSATA port SATA port. Perform the jumper configuration when
connecting HDD.
High definition audio and video signal output port. It
outputs the same video source as VGA. It supports 4K
resolution output and supports mouse operation and
16 HDMI port control.
Note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the VGA
output stops.
17 GND Ground.

3.2.7 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-

32
 User's Manual

XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3
Figure 3-18 Rear panel (1)

Figure 3-19 Rear panel (2)

Figure 3-20 Rear panel (3)

Table 3-17 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function
Audio output port Two-way talk output port which outputs the analog audio signal
1
(MIC OUT) to the devices such as the sound box.
Audio input port Two-way talk input port which receives the analog audio signal
2
(MIC IN) output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
3 Video output port Connect to video output devices such as TV.

33
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

Outputs the analog audio signal to the devices such as the
4 Audio output port
sound box.
Receives the analog audio signal output from the devices such
5 Audio input port
as microphone.
6 Video input port Connect to analog camera to input video signal.
● Four groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4;
Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4:
port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the
Alarm input port
1–16 external alarm source. There are two types; NO (Normally
Open) and NC (Normally Closed).
● When your alarm input device is using external power, make
sure the device and the DVR have the same ground.
● Five groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1–C1,
Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port NO3–C3, Group 4：
port NO4–C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5). These ports
Alarm output port
output alarm signal to the alarm device. Make sure power
1–5 (NO1–
NO5;C1–C5; NC5) supply to the external alarm device.
● NO: Normally open alarm output port.
7
● C: Alarm output public end.
● NC: Normally closed alarm output port.
RS-485 You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
communication RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS-485_B is
port connected to the cable B.
Four-wire full-
Four-wire full-duplex 485 port. T+ and T- is the output wire; R+
duplex RS-485
and R- is the input wire.
port (T+, T-, R+, R-)
Control power Controls 12 VDC power output. It is to control the on-off alarm
output (CTRL 12V) relay output.
12V power output Provides power to external devices such as camera and alarm
port device. Note the supplying power shall be below 1A.

Ground.

8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.

RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer
9
COM transparent COM data.
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard, mouse, and
10 USB port
USB storage device.
Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to
11 VGA video output
view analog video.
External SATA port which connects to the device with SATA port.
12 eSATA port
Perform the jumper configuration when connecting HDD.

34
 User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

High definition audio and video signal output port. It outputs
the same video source as VGA. It supports 4K resolution output
13 HDMI port and supports mouse operation and control.
Note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the VGA output
stops.
14 Power switch Turns on/off the Device.
15 Power input port Inputs power.
16 GND Ground.

3.2.8 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I
Figure 3-21 Rear panel

Table 3-18 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function
1 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
Audio input Receives audio signal output from the devices such as
2
port microphone.
Audio output
3 Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
port
4 GND Ground.
Power cable Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR in case there is
5
fastener any loss.
VGA video Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to
6
output view analog video.
High definition audio and video signal output port. It outputs the
same video source as VGA. It supports 4K resolution output and
7 HDMI port supports mouse operation and control.
Note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the VGA output
stops.
Connects to external devices such as USB storage device,
8 USB port
keyboard and mouse.
9 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
Power input
10 Inputs 12 VDC power.
port

35
 User's Manual

3.2.9 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3
Figure 3-22 Rear panel

Table 3-19 Pear panel description

N
Port Name Function
o.
Video input
1 Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
port
Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and
2 USB port
mouse.
3 VGA port Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.
High definition audio and video signal output port.
4 HDMI port The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-
channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.
5 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
Power input
6 Inputs 12 VDC power.
port

7 Ground terminal.

3.3 Remote Control Operations

Please note the remote control is not our standard accessory and might not be included in the
accessory bag. It is supplied dependent on the model you purchased.

36
 User's Manual
Figure 3-23 Remote control

Table 3-20 Remote control description

No. Name Function
1 Power button Press this button to boot up or shut down the device.
Press this button to input device serial number, so
2 Address
that you can control the Device.
3 Forward Multi-step forward speed and normal speed playback.
4 Slow motion Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.
In playback state, press this button to play back the
5 Next record
next video.
In playback state, press this button to play back the
6 Previous record
previous video.
● In normal playback state, press this button to
pause playback.
● In pause state, press this button to resume to
7 Play/Pause
normal playback.
● In live view window page, press this button to
enter video search menu.
In the reverse playback state, press this button to
pause reverse playback.
8 Reverse/pause
In the reverse playback pause state, press this button
to resume to playback reversing state.
Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation
9 Esc.
(close front page or control).

37
 User's Manual

No. Name Function

● Start or stop record manually.
● In record page, use the direction buttons to select
10 Record the channel that you want to record.
● Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and the
manual record page will be displayed.
Switch between current activated controls by going
left or right.
11 Direction keys In playback state, the keys control the playback
progress bar.
Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).
● Confirms an operation.
12 Enter/menu key ● Go to the OK button.
● Go to the menu.
Multiple-window
13 Switch between multiple-window and one-window.
switch
● In single-channel monitoring mode, press this
button to display the PTZ control and color
setting functions.
● Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control page.
● In motion detection page, press this button with
14 Fn direction keys to complete setup.
● In text mode, press and hold this button to delete
the last character. To use the clearing function:
Long press this button for 1.5 seconds.
● In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and
other information as indicated in the pop-up
message.
● Input password, numbers.
Alphanumeric
15 ● Switch channel.
keys
● Press Shift to switch the input method.

3.4 Mouse Operations

The operations are based on the considerations for right-handed users.

Table 3-21 Mouse operations

Operation Function
Password input dialogue box pops up if you have not logged in yet.
Click left mouse In live view window page, you can go to the main menu.
button When you have selected one menu item, click it to view menu content.
Implement the control operation.

38
 User's Manual

Operation Function
Modify checkbox or motion detection status.
Click combo box to pop up drop-down list.
In text box, click the corresponding button on the panel to enter a numeral
or English character (small/capitalized).
● In English input mode: Click to enter a backspace and click
to delete the previous character.

● In numeral input mode: Click to clear and click to delete the

previous character.

Implement special control operations such as double-click one item in the

file list to play back the video.
Double-click left
mouse button In multiple-window mode, double-click one channel to view in full-window.
Double-click current video again to go back to previous multiple-window
mode.
Right-click in live view window page, the shortcut menu is displayed. For
Right-click different series product, the shortcut menu may vary.
Exit current menu without saving the modification.
In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.
Click scroll wheel
Switch the items in the combo box.
button
Page up or page down.
Point to select
Select current control and move it.
and move
Dragging a Select motion detection zone.
selection box with
left mouse button Select privacy mask zone.

39
 User's Manual

4 Connection

This chapter introduces the typical connection diagrams and ports connections.

4.1 Typical Connection Diagram

● The following figure is for reference only.

Figure 4-1 Connection diagram

4.2 Connecting to Video and Audio Input and Output

4.2.1 Video Input

The video input interface is BNC. The input video format includes: PAL/NTSC BNC (1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω).
The video signal should comply with your national standards.
The input video signal shall have high SNR, low distortion; low interference, natural color, and
suitable lightness.

Guarantee the stability and reliability of the camera signal

The camera shall be installed in a cool, dry place away from the conditions such as direct sunlight,
inflammable, and explosive substances.
The camera and the DVR should have the same grounding to ensure the normal operation of the
camera.

Guarantee stability and reliability of the transmission line

Please use high quality, sound shielded BNC. Please select suitable BNC model according to the

40
 User's Manual
transmission distance.
If the distance is too long, you should use twisted pair cable, and you can add video compensation
devices or use optical fiber to ensure video quality.
You should keep the video signal away from the strong electromagnetic interference, especially the
high tension current.

Keep connection lugs in well contact

The signal line and shielded wire should be fixed firmly and in well connection. Avoid dry joint, lap
welding, and oxidation.

4.2.2 Video Output

Video output includes a BNC (PAL/NTSC1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω) output, a VGA output, and HDMI output.
System supports BNC, VGA and HDMI output at the same time.
When you are using pc-type monitor to replace the monitor, please pay attention to the following
points:
● To defer aging, do not allow the pc monitor to run for a long time.
● Regular demagnetization will keep device maintain proper status.
● Keep it away from strong electromagnetic interference devices.
Using TV as video output device is not a reliable substitution method. You also need to reduce the
working hour and control the interference from power supply and other devices. The low quality TV
may result in device damage.

4.2.3 Audio Input

This series of products audio input port adopt BNC port.
Due to high impedance of audio input, please use active sound pick-up.
Audio transmission is similar to video transmission. Try to avoid interference, dry joint, loose contact
and it shall be away from high tension current.

4.2.4 Audio Output

The audio output signal parameter is usually over 200 mv 1 KΩ (BNC or RCA). It can directly connect
to low impedance earphone, active sound box or amplifier-drive audio output device.
If the sound box and the pick-up cannot be separated spatially, it is easy to arouse squeaking. In this
case you can adopt the following measures:
● Use better sound pick-up with better directing property.
● Reduce the volume of the sound box.
● Using more sound-absorbing materials in decoration can reduce voice echo and improve
acoustics environment.
● Adjust the layout of speaker and pickup to reduce squeaking.

41
 User's Manual

4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and Output

Please read the followings before connecting.

Alarm input
● Make sure alarm input mode is grounding alarm input.
● Grounding signal is needed for alarm input.
● Alarm input needs the low level voltage signal.
● Alarm input mode can be either NC (Normally Closed) or NO (Normally Open).
● When you are connecting two DVRs or you are connecting one DVR and one other device, use a
relay to separate them.

Alarm output
The alarm output port should not be connected to high power load directly (It shall be less than 1A)
to avoid high current which might result in relay damage. Use the contactor to realize the
connection between the alarm output port and the load. The next device connected to the port
must meet the fire enclosure requirements.

How to connect PTZ decoder

● Ensure the decoder has the same grounding with DVR; otherwise the PTZ might not be
controlled. Shielded twisted wire is recommended and the shielded layer is used to connect to
the grounding.
● Avoid high voltage. Ensure proper wiring and some thunder protection measures.
● For too long signal wires, 120 Ω should be parallel connected between A, B lines on the far end to
reduce reflection and guarantee the signal quality.
● "485 A, B" of DVR cannot parallel connect with "485 port" of other device.
● The voltage between of A, B lines of the decoder should be less than 5 V.

Make sure the front-end device has soundly earthed

Improper grounding might result in chip damage.

4.3.1 Introducing Alarm Port

The alarm input ports are dependent on the model you purchased.

Figure 4-2 Alarm ports

42
 User's Manual
Table 4-1 Alarm port description
Icon Description
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, ALARM 1 to ALARM 16. The alarm becomes active in low
14, 15, 16 voltage.
There are four groups of normally open activation output
NO1 C1, NO2 C2, NO3 C3
(on/off button).

Ground cable.

485 communication port. They are used to control devices

485 A/B such as decoder. 120 Ω should be parallel connected
between A, B lines if there are too many PTZ decoders.

4.3.2 Alarm Input

Refer to the following figure for more information.
● Grounding alarm inputs which includes NO (Normally Open) and NC (Normally Closed) type.
● Parallel connect COM end and GND end of the alarm detector (Provide external power to the
alarm detector).
● Parallel connect the Ground of the DVR and the ground of the alarm detector.
● Connect the NC port of the alarm sensor to the DVR alarm input (ALARM).
● Use the same ground with that of DVR if you use external power to the alarm device.

Figure 4-3 Alarm input

4.3.3 Alarm Output

● Provide external power to external alarm device.
● To avoid overloading, read the following relay parameters table carefully.
● RS-485 A/B cable is for the A/B cable of the PTZ decoder.

4.3.4 Alarm Output Relay Parameters

Refer to the actual product for relay model information.

43
 User's Manual
Table 4-2 Alarm output relay parameters
HFD23/005-
Model HRB1-S-DC5V
1ZS
AgNi+ gold-
Material of the touch AuAg10/AgNi10/CuNi30
plating
30 VDC 1 A/125 24 VDC 1
24 VDC 1 A/125 VAC 2 A
VAC 0.5 A A/125 VAC 2 A
Rating 62.5 VA/30 W 250 VA/48 W 250 VA/48 W
(Resistance Load) 125 VAC/60
125 VAC/60 VDC 125 VAC/60 VDC
VDC
2A 2A 2A
500 VAC 1
400 VAC 1 minute 500 VAC 1 minute
minute
Insulation
1000 VAC 1 1000 VAC 1
1000 VAC 1 minute
minute minute
Turn-on Time
5 ms max 5 ms max
Turn-off Time
5 × 106 times
5 × 106 times
1 × 107 times (300
(300 times/MIN)
Longevity times/MIN)
2.5 × 104 times 2.5 × 104 times
1 × 105 times
(30 times/MIN) (30 times/MIN)
–30 °C to
Working Temperature –40 °C to +70 °C
+70 °C

44
 User's Manual

5 Local Configurations

Read the following notes prior to using the Device.

● The figures in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The
actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased.
● The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions
described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
● Conventions for mouse operations on a menu.
◇ Click: On the menu, click the mouse once on an option to enter the option setting.
◇ Right-click: On any page, right-click the mouse once to return to the previous level.

5.1 Initial Settings

5.1.1 Booting Up

● Ensure the input voltage corresponds to the power requirement of the Device. Power on the
Device after the power cable is properly connected.
● To protect the Device, connect the Device with the power cable first, and then connect to the
power source.
● To ensure the stable work of the Device and the external devices connected to the Device and to
prolong the HDD life, it is recommended to refer to the national related standard to use the
power source that provides stable voltage with less interference from ripples. UPS power source
is recommended.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the Device to the monitor.
Step 2 Plug in the power cable to the Device.
Step 3 Press the power button to turn on the Device. The power indicator light is on.
On the connected monitor, the live view screen is displayed by default. If you turn on the
Device during the time period that is configured for recording, the system starts recording
after it is turned on, and you will see the icon indicating recording status is working in the
specific channels.

5.1.2 Initializing the Device

Background Information
When booting up for the first time, you need to configure the password information for admin (by
default).

45
 User's Manual

To secure the Device, we strongly recommend you properly keep the password for admin and
modify it regularly.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn on the Device.

Figure 5-1 Location, language and video standard

Step 2 Select your location from the drop-down list, then language and video standard will match
your location automatically. You can change the language and video standard manually.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 Select the checkbox that I have read and agree to all terms, and then click Next.

Figure 5-2 Time

Step 5 Select system zone, configure system time, and then click Next.

46
 User's Manual
Figure 5-3 Enter password

Step 6 Configure the password information for admin.

Table 5-1 Password information

Parameter Description
User By default, the user is admin.
Password In the Password box, enter the password for admin.
The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32
Confirm Password characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and
special characters (excluding"'", """, ";", ":" and "&").
In the Prompt Hint box, enter the information that can remind you
of the password.
Prompt Hint
On the login interface, click , the prompt will display to help you
find back the password.
Step 7 Click Next.

Figure 5-4 Unlock pattern

Step 8 Draw an unlock pattern.

After the setting is completed, the Password Protection page is displayed.

47
 User's Manual

● The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four points.
● If you do not want to configure the unlock pattern, click Skip.
● Once you have configured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock
pattern as the default login method. If you skip this setting, enter the password for
login.

Figure 5-5 Password protection

Step 9 Configure the protection parameters for password.

After configuration, if you forget the password for admin user, you can reset the password
through the reserved email address or security questions.
If you do not want to configure the settings, disable the email address and security
questions functions on the interface.

Table 5-2 Password protection parameters

Password Protection Mode Description
Enter the reserved email address.
In the Reserved Email box, enter an email address for
Reserved Email password reset. If you forget the password, enter the
security code that you will get from this reserved email
address to reset the password of admin.
Configure the security questions and answers.
Security Questions If you forget the password, enter the answers to the
questions can make you reset the password.

If you want to configure the email or security questions function later or you want to change the
configurations, select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Password Reset.
Step 10 Click OK to complete the settings.
Step 11 Select I have read and agree to all terms checkbox.
Step 12 Click Next.
The Startup Wizard interface is displayed.

48
 User's Manual

5.1.3 Resetting Password

You can reset the password by the following methods when you forget the password for admin
account.
● If the password reset function is enabled, you can use mobile phone to scan the QR code to reset
the password. For details, see "5.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface".
● If the password reset function is disabled, there are two situations:
◇ If you configured security questions, you can find back the password by the security
questions.
◇ If you did not configure the security questions, you can only use the reset button on the
mainboard to restore the Device to factory default. For details, see "5.1.3.3 Using Reset Button
on the Mainboard".

The reset button is available on select models.

5.1.3.1 Enabling Password Reset Function

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Account > Password Reset.

Figure 5-6 Password reset

Step 2 Enable the Password Reset function.

This function is enabled by default.

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
When Password reset function is disabled, you can retrieve password through following
ways:
● You can retrieve password through resetting password on local interface or using Reset
button on the mainboard when the device supports Reset button.
● You can only retrieve password through resetting password on local interface (make
sure that security questions are preset) when the device does not support Reset button.

49
 User's Manual

5.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface

Procedure
Step 1 Enter the login page.
● If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login page is displayed. Click
Forgot Pattern, the password login page is displayed.
● If you did not configure unlock pattern, the password login page is displayed. Click
to display the password with plaintext.

To log in from other user account, on the unlock pattern login page, click Switch User; or
on the password login page, in the User Name list, select other users to log in.

Figure 5-7 Login (1)

Figure 5-8 Login (2)

50
 User's Manual

Step 2 Click .
● If you have set the reserved email address, the Prompt message page is displayed.
● If you did not set the reserved email address, the email entering page is displayed. See
Step 3. Enter the email address, and then click Next, the Prompt message page is
displayed.

Figure 5-9 Note

Step 3 Click OK.

After clicking OK, the system will collect your information for password reset, and the
information includes but not limited to email address, and device serial number. Read the
prompt carefully before clicking OK.

51
 User's Manual
Figure 5-10 Reset mode (email)

Figure 5-11 Reset mode (app)

Step 4 Reset the password.

● QR code
Follow the on-screen instructions to get the security code in your reserved email
address. In the Security Code box, enter the security code.

◇ You can get the security code twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to
get the security code once again, refresh the page.
◇ Use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24

hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.

● App
Select QR Code for Binding Device as Reset Mode, and then follow the on-screen

52
 User's Manual
instructions to get the security code on your DMSS app. In the Security Code box,
enter the security code.
● Security questions
1. For Reset Mode, select Security Questions.

If you did not configure the security questions before, in the Reset Type list, there
will be no Security Questions.
2. In the Answer box, enter the correct answers.

Figure 5-12 Security questions

Step 5 Click Next.

53
 User's Manual
Figure 5-13 New password

Step 6 In the New Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm
Password box.
Step 7 Click Save. The password resetting is started.
Step 8 Click OK.
A pop-up message is displayed asking if you want to sync the password with the remote
devices.
● Click Cancel, the resetting is finished.
● Click OK, the Sync Info page is displayed.

54
 User's Manual
Figure 5-14 Sync password

This message appears only when there are digital channels instead of only analog
channels.

Figure 5-15 Sync info

55
 User's Manual

5.1.3.3 Using Reset Button on the Mainboard

Background Information
You can always use the reset button on the mainboard to reset the Device to the factory default.

The reset button is available on select models.

Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the Device from power source, and then remove the cover panel. For details
about removing the cover panel, see "2.2 Installing HDD".
Step 2 Find the reset button on the mainboard, and then press and hold the reset button for 5
seconds to 10 seconds.

Figure 5-16 Reset button

Step 3 Restart the Device.

After the Device is rebooted, the settings have been restored to the factory default. You
can start resetting the password.

5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard

5.1.4.1 Entering Startup Wizard

The Startup Wizard helps you configure the basic settings to set up the Device.
After you have initialized the Device, the Startup Wizard page is displayed.

56
 User's Manual
Figure 5-17 Startup wizard

● If you select the Auto-check for updates checkbox, the system will notify you automatically
when updates are available.
● After the auto-check function is enabled, to notify you to update timely, the system will collect
the information such as IP address, device name, firmware version, and device serial number. The
collected information is only used to verify the legality of the Device and push upgrade notices.
● If you clear the Auto-check for updates checkbox, the system will not perform automatic
checks.

5.1.4.2 Configuring General Settings

You can configure the general settings for the Device such as Device name, language, and settings
for instant playback.
You can also configure general settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic.

Procedure
Step 1 On the Startup Wizard page, click Next.

57
 User's Manual
Figure 5-18 Basic

Step 2 Configure the basic settings parameters.

Table 5-3 Basic settings

Parameter Description
Device Name In the Device Name box, enter the Device name.
Device No. In the Device No. box, enter a number for the Device.
Language In the Language list, select a language for the Device system.
In the Video Standard list, select PAL or NTSC according to your
Video Standard
actual situation.
In the Instant Playback box, enter the time length for playing back
the recoded video.
Instant Playback
On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to
play back the recorded video within the configured time.
In the Logout Time box, enter the standby time for the Device. The
Device automatically logs out when it is not working for the
configured time period. You need to log in to the Device again.
The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby time
Logout Time
for the Device.
Click Monitor Channel(s) when logout. You can select the
channels that you want to continue monitoring when you logged
out.
Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view screen,
Navigation Bar
the navigation bar is displayed.

58
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider.
Mouse Pointer Speed The bigger the value is, the faster the double-clicking speed must
be.

5.1.4.3 Configuring Date and Time Settings

You can configure the system time, choose the time zone, set the daylight saving time, and enable
the NTP server.
You can also configure date and time settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Date
&Time.

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the general settings, on the General page, click Next.

Figure 5-19 Date&Time

Step 2 Configure the settings for date and time parameters.

Table 5-4 Date and time parameters

Parameter Description
In the System Time box, enter time for the system.
Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the
system, and the time in adjust automatically.

System Time
Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the
recorded video cannot be searched. It is recommended to
avoid the recoding period or stop recording first before you
change the system time.

Time Zone In the Time Zone list, select a time zone for the system.
Date Format In the Date Format list, select a date format for the system.

59
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Date Separator list, select a separator style for the
Date Separator
date.
In the Time Format list, select 12-HOUR or 24-HOUR for the
Time Format
time display style.
Enable the Daylight Saving Time function. Click Week or click
DST
Date.
Start Time
Configure the start time and end time for the DST.
End Time
Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the
NTP server.
NTP
If NTP is enabled, device time will be automatically
synchronized with server.

In the Server Address box, enter the IP address or domain

name of the corresponding NTP server.
Serve Address
Click Manual Update, the Device starts syncing with the
server immediately.
The system supports TCP protocol only and the default
Port
setting is 123.
In the Interval box, enter the amount of time that you want
Interval the Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value
ranges from 0 to 65535.

5.1.4.4 Configuring Network Settings

You can configure the basic network settings such as net mode, IP version, and IP address of the
Device.
You can also configure network settings by selecting Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP.

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the date and time settings, on the Date &Time page, click Next.

60
 User's Manual
Figure 5-20 TCP/IP

Step 2 Configure the settings for network parameters.

Table 5-5 Network parameters

Parameter Description
In the IP Version list, you can select IPv4 or IPv6. Both versions are
IP Version
supported for access.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Device.
Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is enabled.
● If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in the
IP Address box, Subnet Mask box and Default Gateway box.
DHCP If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.
● If you want manually configure the IP information, disable the
DHCP function first.
● If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.
IP Address Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask
and default gateway.
Subnet Mask

Default Gateway IP address and default gateway must be in the same network
segment.

DNS DHCP Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.
Preferred DNS In the Preferred DNS box, enter the IP address of DNS.
Alternate DNS In the Alternate DNS box, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.

61
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the MTU box, enter a value for network card. The value ranges
from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.
The suggested MTU values are as below.
● 1500: The biggest value of Ethernet information package. This
value is typically selected if there is no PPPoE or VPN
MTU
connection, and it is also the default value of some routers,
network adapters and switches.
● 1492: Optimized value for PPPoE.
● 1468: Optimized value for DHCP.
● 1450: Optimized value for VPN.
Click Test to test if the entered IP address and gateway are
Test
interworking.

5.1.4.5 Configuring P2P Settings

You can add the Device into your phone client or the platform to manage.
You can also configure P2P function by selecting Main Menu > Network > P2P.

Make sure the DVR is connected into the Internet, and if yes, in the Status box of the P2P page, it
shows Online.

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the network settings, on the Network page, click Next.

Figure 5-21 P2P

Step 2 Enable the P2P function.

After the P2P function is enabled and connected to the Internet, the system will collect
your information for remote access, and the information includes but not limited to email

62
 User's Manual
address, MAC address, and device serial number.
You can start adding the device.
● Mobile Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the
Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device.
● Platform: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the P2P management
platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage
the device in the WAN. For details, refer to the P2P operation manual.

● You can also view the QR code of Mobile Client and Device SN by clicking on the
upper-right corner of the pages after you have entered the Main Menu.
● If selection of this function is canceled, the Note page is displayed. Choose to enable it
or not according to your actual need.

Figure 5-22 Note

To use this function, this section uses adding device into Mobile Client as an example.

The following steps are for reference only. Refer to the user's manual of the mobile client
for detailed instructions.
1. Use your phone to scan the QR code under Mobile Client to download the application.
2.
Step 3 On your phone, open the application, and then tap .
1. Tap Device Manager.
2. Tap on the upper-right corner.
The page requiring device initialization is displayed. A pop-up message reminding you
to make sure the Device is initialized is displayed.
3. Tap OK.● If the Device has not been initialized, Tap Device Initialization to
perform initializing by following the onscreen instructions.
● If the Device has been initialized, you can start adding it directly.

4. Tap Add Device.

You can add wireless device or wired device. The Manual uses adding wired device as
an example.
5. Tap P2P.
6. Enter a name for the DVR, the username and password, scan the QR code under Device
SN.
7. Tap Start Live Preview.

63
 User's Manual
The Device is added and displayed on the live view page of the cell phone.

5.1.4.6 Configuring Encode Settings

You can configure the settings of main stream and sub stream for the Device.
You can also configure encode settings by selecting Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Audio/Video.

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the P2P settings, on the Audio/Video page, click Next.

Figure 5-23 Encode

Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters.

Table 5-6 Parameter description

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the
Channel
settings for.
Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video
Smart Codec bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage
space.
● Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, MD (Motion Detect),
Type or Alarm.
● Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.

64
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Compression list, select the encode mode.
● H.265: Main profile encoding. This setting is recommended.
● H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high
Compression definition.
● H.264: Main profile encoding.
● H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher bit
stream compared with other settings for the same definition.
In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.
Resolution The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your
device model.
Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value is,
the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes
along with the resolution.
Frame Rate (FPS) Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25;
in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30. However,
the actual range of frame rate that you can select depends on the
capability of the Device.
In the Bit Rate Type list, select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) or VBR
Bit Rate Type (Variable Bit Rate). If you select CBR, the image quality cannot be
configured; if you select VBR, the image quality can be configured.
This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List.
Quality
The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval The interval between two reference frames.
In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to
Bit Rate (Kb/S) change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the
image will become.
Video Enable the function for sub stream.
Audio Click More, the More page is displayed.
Audio Source ● Audio: This function is enabled by default for main stream. You
need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is
enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video
stream.
● Audio Source: In the Audio Source list, you can select Local and
Compression HDCVI.
◇ Local: The audio signal is input from Audio In port.
◇ HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera.
● Compression: In the Compression list, select a format that you
need.

5.1.4.7 Configuring Snapshot Settings

You can configure the basic snapshot settings such as quantity of snapshot each time, channel(s) to
take snapshot, and image size and quality of snapshot.
You can also configure general settings by selecting Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.

65
 User's Manual

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the Encode page, click Next.

Figure 5-24 Snapshot

Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters.

Table 5-7 Snapshot parameters

Parameter Description
In the Manual Snapshot list, select how many snapshots you want to
Manual Snapshot
take each time.
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the
Channel
settings for.
In the Mode list, you can select Human Face, Event, or General as the
event type for which you want to take a snapshot.
● Scheduled: The snapshot is taken during the scheduled period.
Type ● Event: The snapshot is taken when there is an alarm event occurs,
such as motion detection event, video loss, and local alarms.
● Face Snapshot: The snapshot is taken when the face is detected.
The face detection function is support only with the Channel 1.
In the Size list, select a value for the image. The bigger the value is, the
Size
better the image will become.
Configure the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level is, the
Quality
better the image will become.
Interval Configure or customize the snapshot frequency.

5.1.4.8 Configuring Basic Storage Settings

You can configure the settings for the situations when HDD is full, file length and time length of
recorded video, and the settings if to auto-delete the old files.
You can also configure basic storage settings by selecting Main Menu > STORAGE > Basic.

66
 User's Manual

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the Snapshot page, click Next.

Figure 5-25 Basic

Step 2 Configure the basic storage settings parameters.

Table 5-8 Basic storage settings

Parameter Description
Configure the settings for the situation when all the read/write discs
are full, and there are no more free discs.
● Select Stop to stop recording.
Disk Full ● Select Overwrite to overwrite the recorded video files always
from the earliest time.

The locked recorded video files will not be overwritten.

Create Video Files Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.
Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, in the Delete
Delete Expired Files Expired Files list, select Custom to configure the time length for
how long you want to keep the old files.

5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule

You can configure the schedule for the recorded video such as channels to record, alarm settings,
and the armed period.
You can also configure recorded video storage settings by selecting Main Menu > STORAGE >
Schedule > Record.

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the basic storage settings, on the Basic page, click Next.

67
 User's Manual
Figure 5-26 Record

Step 2 Configure the record settings parameters.

Table 5-9 Record settings

Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to record the video.
In the Pre-record list, enter the amount of time that you want
Pre-record
to start the recording in advance.
If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set
one of the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded
files into different HDDs. In case one of the HDDs is damaged,
you can find the backup in the other HDD.
● Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Manager, and then
set a HDD as redundant HDD.
● Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Record, and
then select the Redundancy checkbox.
◇ If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy
Redundancy function takes effect next time you record no matter
you select the checkbox or not.
◇ If the selected channel is recording, the current
recorded files will be packed, and then start recording
according to the new schedule.

● This function is available on select models.

● The redundant HDD only back up the recorded videos but
not snapshots.
Select the checkbox of the event type which includes General,
Motion (motion detect, video loss, tempering, diagnosis),
Event type Alarm (IoT alarms, local alarms, alarms from alarm box, IPC
external alarms, IPC Offline alarms), M&A, Intelligent (IVS
events, face detection), and POS.

68
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Define a period during which the configured recording setting
is active.
Period

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.

Copy Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

Step 3 Define the video recording period by drawing or editing. By default, it is active all the time.
● Define the period by drawing.
1) Select the checkbox of event type.

Figure 5-27 Event type

2) Define a period. The system supports maximum six periods.

3) On the timeline, drag to define a period. The Device starts recoding the selected event
type in the defined period.

Figure 5-28 Timeline

The color bar indicates the event type that is effective in a defined period:

● Recording priority in case of event types are overlapped: M&A > Alarm >
Intelligent > Motion > General.
● Select the checkbox of event type, and then click to clear the defined period.

69
 User's Manual
● When selecting MD&Alarm, the MD and Alarm checkboxes will be cleared
respectively.
● Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.
1) Click .

Figure 5-29 Period

2) Enter the time frame for the period and select the event checkbox.
3) Click OK to save the settings.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

● Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

● After configuring the recording schedule settings, you need to perform the following
operations to start recording according to the defined schedule.
◇ Enable the alarm event and configure the settings for the recording channel. For

details, see "5.10 Alarm Events Settings".

◇ You need to enable the recording function, see "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".

5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule

You can configure the storage schedule for the snapshot such as channels to take snapshot, alarm
settings, and the armed period.
You can also configure snapshot storage settings by selecting Main Menu > STORAGE >
Schedule > Snapshot.

Procedure
Step 1 After you have configured the video recording settings, on the Record page, click Next.

70
 User's Manual
Figure 5-30 Snapshot

Step 2 Configure the snapshot settings parameters.

Table 5-10 Snapshot settings

Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to take a snapshot.
Select the checkbox of the event type which includes General, Motion,
Event type
Alarm, M&A, Intelligent, and POS.
Define a period during which the configured snapshot setting is active. For
Period details about defining a period, see "5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule".
Copy Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.
Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Click OK.
The live view screen is displayed. The setting up with startup wizard is completed. You can
start using the Device.
Step 5 (Optional) After the setting with startup wizard is completed, if the connected HDMI
display resolution is inconsistent with default resolution (1280 × 1024), a dialog box will
pop up. Choose to switch the resolution or not.

Figure 5-31 Change resolution

71
 User's Manual

5.2 Live View

After you logged in the Device, the live view is displayed. The number of channels displayed
depends on your model.
To enter the live view screen from other pages, click on the upper-right corner of the screen.

Figure 5-32 Live view

5.2.1 Live View Screen

You can view the live video from the connected cameras through each channel on the screen.
● By default, the system time, channel name and channel number are displayed on each channel
window. This setting can be configured by selecting Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay >
Overlay.
● The figure in the bottom right corner represents channel number. If the channel position is
changed or the channel name is modified, you can recognize the channel number by this figure
and then perform the operations such as record query and playback.

Table 5-11 Live view description

Icon Function
Indicates recording status. This icon displays when the video is being
recorded.
This icon displays when the motion detection occurs in the scene.

72
 User's Manual

Icon Function
This icon displays when the video loss is detected.
This icon displays when the channel monitoring is locked.

To switch the position of two channels, point to one of the two channels, and then drag the window
to the other channel.

5.2.2 Live View Control bar

The live view control bar provides you access to perform the operations such as playback, zoom,
real-time backup, manual snapshot, voice talk, adding remote devices, and streams switch.
When you move the pointer to the top middle position of a channel window, the live view control
bar is displayed.

If there is not operation for six seconds after the control bar is displayed, the control bar hides
automatically.

Figure 5-33 Analog channel

73
 User's Manual
Figure 5-34 Digital channel

Table 5-12 Control bar description

No. Function No. Function No. Function
Instant Manual Camera
1 4 7
Playback Snapshot Registration
2 Digital Zoom 5 Mute — —
Instant
3 6 Audio Talk — —
Record

5.2.2.1 Instant Playback

You can play back the previous 5 seconds to 60 minutes of the recorded video.
By clicking , the instant playback page is displayed. The instant playback has the following
features:
● Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.
● Play, pause and close playback.
● The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during instant
playback and will not display until exited.
● During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.
● To change the playback time, select Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic, in the Instant
Play box, enter the time you want to play back.

74
 User's Manual
Figure 5-35 General

5.2.2.2 Digital Zoom

You can enlarge a specific area of the image to view the details by either of the following two ways.
● Click , the icon switches to . Hold down the left mouse button to select the area you want
to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released.
● Point to the center that you want to enlarge, rotate the wheel button to enlarge the area.

● For some models, when the image is enlarged in the first way described previously, the selected
area is zoomed proportionally according to the window.
● When the image is in the enlarged status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view
the other enlarged areas.
● Right-click on the enlarged image to return the original status.

5.2.2.3 Instant Record

You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.
By clicking , the recording is started. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is
automatically saved into the connected USB storage device.

75
 User's Manual

5.2.2.4 Manual Snapshot

You can take one to five snapshots of the video and save into a USB storage device.
By clicking , you can take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved into the connected
USB storage device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.

To change the quantity of snapshots, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > Snapshot, in the
Manual Snap list, select the snapshot quantity.

5.2.2.5 Mute (Analog channel only)

You can mute the video sound by clicking . This function is supported in single-channel view.

5.2.2.6 Warning Light (Supported on Camera with Warning Light Function)

Click to manually control the camera to turn on the warning light function.

5.2.2.7 Siren (Supported on Camera with Siren Function)

Click to manually control the camera to generate alarm sound.

5.2.2.8 Two-way Talk (Digital channel Only)

You can perform the voice interaction between the Device and the remote device to improve
efficiency of emergency. This function is supported only when the remotely connected IPC device
supports bidirectional talk.
● Click , the icon switches to , the bidirectional talk of the remote device is turned on. The
bidirectional talk of other digital channels is disabled.
● Click to cancel the bidirectional talk. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is
resumed.

5.2.2.9 Adding Camera (Digital channel Only)

You can view the information of remote devices and add new remote devices to replace the current
connected devices.
By clicking , the Camera List page is displayed. For details about adding the remote devices,
see ."5.6 Configuring Remote Devices".

5.2.3 Navigation Bar

You can access the functions to perform operations through the function icons on the navigation
bar. For example, you can access Main Menu and switch window split mode.

The navigation bar is disabled by default. It does not appear in the live view screen until it is enabled.

76
 User's Manual
To enable it, select Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic, enable the Navigation Bar, and then
click Apply.

Figure 5-36 Navigation bar

Table 5-13 Navigation bar description

Icon Function
Open Main Menu.
Expand or condense the navigation bar.
Select view layout.
Go to the previous screen.
Go to the next screen.
Enable tour function. The icon switches to .
Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see "5.4 Controlling PTZ
Cameras".
Open the Image page.

This function is supported only in single-channel layout.

Open the record search page. For detail, see ."5.9 Playing Back Video"
Open the Alarm Status page to view the device alarm status.
Open the CHANNEL INFO page to display the information of each
channel.
Open the Camera List page. For details, see "5.6.1 Adding Remote
Devices".
Open the Network page. For details, see "5.15.1 Configuring Network
Settings".
Open the Disk Manager page. For details, see "5.18.3 Configuring
Disk Manager".
Open the USB Management page. For details about USB operations,
see "5.14.2 Backing up Files", "5.21.3 Viewing Event Information",
"5.20.4 Exporting and Importing System Settings", and "5.20.6
Updating the Device".

5.2.4 Shortcut Menu

You can quickly access some function pages such as main menu, record search, PTZ setting, color
setting and select the view split mode.
Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed.

After you access any page through shortcut menu, you can return to the previous screen by right-
clicking on the current screen.

77
 User's Manual
Figure 5-37 Shortcut menu

Table 5-14 Menu parameters

Function Description
Main Menu Open Main Menu page.
Open the PLAYBACK page where you can search and play back
Search
record files.
PTZ Open the PTZ page.
Configure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or
View Layout
multi-channel layout.
Previous Screen Click Previous Screen to go to the previous screen. For example,
if you are using 4-split mode, the first screen is displaying the
Next Screen channel 1-4, click Next screen, you can view channel 5-8.
Open the Camera List page. For details, see "5.6 Configuring
Remote Devices".
Add Camera This parameter displays on the right-click menu only after
setting at least one channel to IP type in Main Menu >
CAMERA > Channel Type.

78
 User's Manual

Function Description
● Select Record Mode, you can configure the recording mode
as Auto or Manual, or stop the recording. You can also
Manual Control enable or disable snapshot function
● Select Alarm Mode, you can configure alarm output
settings.
● Select General, the layout of live view screen is as default.
Live Mode ● Select Face, the detected face snapshots are displayed in
the bottom of the live view screen.
Point to the channel window and right-click on it to open the
shortcut menu, and then click Auto Focus.
Auto Focus

Not all cameras support this function.

Open the Image page where you can adjust the video image
Image
color.
Camera Property Click to modify the camera properties.
Sub Port Click to switch to extra screen control.

5.2.5 AI Preview Mode

You can view the detected faces snapshots and comparison results of detected faces and the faces in
the database, and play back the recorded picture file.
To display the AI preview mode, the face detection function must be enabled. For details, see
"5.11.2.1 Face Detection".
Right-click on the live view screen to display the shortcut menu, and then select Live Mode > AI
Mode, the AI preview mode page is displayed.

79
 User's Manual
Figure 5-38 Live view

● : Indicates the quantity of detected faces from 0 A.M. to midnight.

● : Indicates the quantity of detected humans 0 A.M. to midnight.
● : Indicates the quantity of detected motor vehicles 0 A.M. to midnight.
● : Indicates the quantity of detected non-motor vehicles 0 A.M. to midnight.
● : Click this icon and then select the face attributes that you want to display on the AI preview
mode. Maximum four attributes are supported to display.
● : Click this icon to export counting report in .csv format. The report information includes date,
starting time, ending time, and the number of human, vehicle and face. The title of report is
named as "device name_ XVR_AI_Statistics_starting time_ending time.csv".

80
 User's Manual
Figure 5-39 Properties

5.2.6 Channel Sequence

You can adjust the channel sequence displayed on live page on actual needs.

The live view page displays the default channel sequence after restoring factory defaults.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view page and select Sequence.

● The system displays the maximum number of window splits supported by the DVR
after selecting Sequence.
● The Sequence page displays only the channel name and channel number of added
remote devices. represents the remote device is online, and represents the
remote device is offline.

81
 User's Manual
Figure 5-40 Sequence

Step 2 Adjust channel sequence.

● Drag a channel to the target window split.
● Drag a window split to another to change the sequence.
You can view the channel sequence according to the channel number on the lower-right
corner of the window split.

82
 User's Manual
Figure 5-41 Adjusted sequence

5.2.7 Color Setting

You can adjust the video image color effect such as sharpness, brightness, and contrast. The
parameters are different according to the connected camera type. Take analog channel as an
example.
Parameters displayed on the page vary from different cameras.
In the live view screen, right-click on the analog channel to see the shortcut menu, and then select
Image, the Image page is displayed.

83
 User's Manual
Figure 5-42 Image

Table 5-15 Image settings

Parameter Description
Divide 24 hours into two periods and configure the corresponding
Period
color settings.
Enable the function and then set the effective time for each
Effective Time
period.
Adjust the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the
Sharpness more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.
The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.
Adjust the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The
Hue
default value is 50.
Adjust the image brightness. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The
default value is 50.
The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You
Brightness can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or
bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is
too big.
The recommended range is between 40 and 60.

84
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Adjust the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more
obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will
become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not
obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to
Contrast become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too
small, the image is likely to become dim.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Adjust the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color
will become. This value does not influence the general image
Saturation lightness.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
In the Color Mode list, you can select Standard, Soft, Bright, Vivid,
Bank, Customized 1, Customized 2, Customized 3, and Customized
Color Mode 4.
The sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation will adjust
automatically according to the selected color mode.
Enhance the image effect. Adjust the effect value.
● Click , image is adjusted to the optimized effect
automatically.
EQ ● Click , the current effect setting will be locked.

Only HD analog channel supports this function.

Adjust the display position of the image in the channel window.
The value indicates pixel. The default value is 16.
Position

This function is only supported by analog channel.

You can customize four color modes.

1. Click Custom. The Custom Color page is displayed.
2. In the Color Mode list, select Custom 1, for example. Then
configure the settings for sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast
Custom and saturation. If you select All, the configuration will apply to
all four customized color modes.
3. Click OK.
4. On the Image page, in the Color Mode list, you can select the
customized color mode.

5.2.8 Live View Display

5.2.8.1 Configuring Display Settings

You can configure the display effect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting image
transparency, and selecting the resolution.

85
 User's Manual

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Display.

Figure 5-43 Display

Step 2 Configure the settings for the display parameters.

Table 5-16 Display parameters

Parameter Description
Output Port Indicates the main screen port.
Select the Time Title checkbox, the current
system time displays in each channel
Time Title
window in live view screen. To hide the
time, clear the checkbox.
Main Screen
Select the Channel Title checkbox, the
channel name, channel number and
Channel Title recording status display in each channel
window in live view screen. To hide the
time, clear the checkbox.

86
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the Original Ratio checkbox, the
Original Ratio video image displays in its actual size in the
channel window.
Click SETTING to enable AI rule, bounding
View Setting box of IVS target and SMD rule on the live
page.
Live Audio Select the Live Audio checkbox to enable
the audio adjustment function in the
channel window on the live view screen.
Volume Move the slider to adjust the volume of live
audio.
Configure the transparency of the graphical
Transparency user interface (GUI). The higher the value,
the more transparent the GUI becomes.
Select resolution for the video. The default
resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is
1280 × 1024.
Resolution
Some of the resolution options might not
be supported on the HDMI port.

● General: No information is displayed on

the channel window.
● AI Mode: Displays the detected face
Live Mode snapshots.

This function is available on select models.

Enable extra screen function. After this
function is enabled, you can select which
Enable port as extra screen port, and the other port
automatically becomes the main screen
port.
Select the VGA port or HDMI port as the port
connected by a secondary monitor. For
Output Port example, if you select HDMI port as the extra
screen port, the VGA port automatically
becomes the main screen port.
Sub Screen
Select resolution for the video. The default
resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is
1280 × 720.
Resolution
Some of the resolution options might not
be supported on the HDMI port.

After it is enabled, the sub screen will

Show Message display alarm message when an alarm is
triggered.

87
 User's Manual

Parameter Description

● The main menu does not display on the extra screen.

● If you do not enable the extra screen function, both the VGA port and HDMI port display the
same image.

5.2.8.2 Configuring Zero-Channel Settings

You can view several video sources on one channel on the web end.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Zero-Channel.

Figure 5-44 Zero-channel

Step 2 Configure the settings for the zero-channel parameters.

Table 5-17 Zero-channel parameters

Parameter Description
Enable Enable zero-channel function.
In the Compression list, select the video compression standard
Compression
according to the device capability. The default is H.265.
In the Resolution list, select the video resolution. The default is
Resolution
704 × 576 (D1).
Select a value between 1 and 25 for PAL standard, and between
Frame Rate (FPS) 1 and 30 for NTSC standard. The actual arrange is decided and
selected dependent on the Device capability.
The default value is 1024Kb/S. The actual arrange is decided
Bit Rate (Kb/S) and selected dependent on the Device capability and frame
rate.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
In the live page on the web, click to select one of the multi-
channel modes, and then you can view the local video image.

88
 User's Manual

5.2.8.3 Configuring TV
You can adjust the border margins in top, bottom, left and right directions as well as the brightness
of the monitor connected to the Video out port of the Device.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > TV Adjust.

Figure 5-45 TV adjust

Step 2 Configure the parameters according to your actual situation.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.2.9 Configuring Tour Settings

Background Information
You can configure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in turn
according to the channel group configured in tour settings. The system displays one channel group
for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour Setting.

89
 User's Manual
Figure 5-46 Main screen

Figure 5-47 Sub screen

Step 2 Configure the settings for the tour parameters for both Main Screen and Sub Screen.

90
 User's Manual
Table 5-18 Tour parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable tour function.
Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays on
Interval (Sec.) the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds, and the
default value is 5 seconds.
Motion Tour, Alarm Select the View 1 or View 8 for Motion Tour and Alarm Tour (system
Tour alarm events).
In the Live Layout list, select View 1, View 4, View 8, or other modes
Live Layout
that are supported by the Device.
Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting.
● Add a channel group: Click Add, in the pop-up Add Group channel,
select the channels to form a group, and then click Save.
● Delete a channel group: Select the checkbox of any channel group,
and then click Delete.
Channel Group ● Edit a channel group: Select the checkbox of any channel group and
then click Modify, or double-click on the group. The Modify
Channel Group dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the
channels.
● Click Move up or Move down to adjust the position of channel
group.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

● On the upper-right corner of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press
Shift to switch between (image switching is allowed) and (image switching is
not allowed) to turn on/off the tour function.
● On the navigation bar, click to enable the tour and click to disable it.

Related Operations
● Add a channel group.
1. Click Add.
2. Select the channels that you want to group for tour.

If you want to select more than one channel, in the Live Layout list, do not select View 1.
3. Click OK.
● Modify a channel group.
Double-click on a channel group, the Channel Group Modified page is displayed. You can
modify channel group and click OK to complete the settings.

5.2.10 Quick Operation Bar

You can quickly access to the function modules on function tiles and setting menu through shortcut
icons on quick operation bar.

91
 User's Manual
This topic uses ALARM and CAMERA an examples to show you how to quickly access to other
modules.

Shortcut Icons on Function Titles

Click ALARM to enter the ALARM page.

Figure 5-48 Alarm

Table 5-19 Alarm parameters

Icon Description
Click to go to SEARCH page.
Click to go to ALARM page.
Click to go to AI page.
Click to go to POS page.
Click to go to NETWORK page.
Click to go to MAINTAIN page.
Click to go to BACKUP page.
Click to go to DISPLAY page.
Click to go to AUDIO page.

Shortcut Icons on Setting Menu

Click CAMERA to enter the CAMERA page.

92
 User's Manual
Figure 5-49 Camera

Table 5-20 Camera parameters

Icon Description
Click to go to CAMERA page.
Click to go to NETWORK page.
Click to go to STORAGE page.
Click to go to SYSTEM page.
Click to go to SECURITY page.
Click to go to ACCOUNT page.

5.3 Entering Main Menu

Right-click on the live view screen, and then the shortcut menu is displayed. Click Main Menu and
then log in to the system.

93
 User's Manual
Figure 5-50 Main menu

94
 User's Manual
Table 5-21 Main menu description
No. Icon Description
Includes nine function tiles: SEARCH, ALARM,
SMART DETECTION, POS, IoT, MAINTAIN,
BACKUP, DISPLAY and AUDIO. Click each tile
to open the configuration page of the tile.
● SEARCH: Search for and play back the
recorded video saved on the Device.
● ALARM: Search for alarm information and
configure alarm event actions.
● SMART DETECTION: Search SMD, face
detection, and IVS information, and
configure related settings.
● POS: You can connect the Device to the POS
(Point of Sale) machine and receive the
information from it.
● IoT: IoT live video preview, search, export
1 Function tiles
reports, and configure function settings.
● MAINTAIN: You can view log and system
information, test network and do other
maintenance work.
● BACKUP: Search and back up the video files
to the external storage device such as USB
storage device.
● DISPLAY: Configure the display effect such
as displaying content, image transparency,
and resolution, and enable the zero-channel
function.
● AUDIO: Manage audio files and configure
the playing schedule. The audio file can be
played in response to an alarm event if the
voice prompts function is enabled.
indicates the current page of main menu.
2 Switch icon Click to switch to the next page or click
or to turn page.
Includes six configurations through which you
can configure camera settings, network settings,
3 Setting menu
storage settings, system settings, account
settings, and view information.

4 Live Click to go to the live view screen.

When you point to , the current user account

5
is displayed.
Click , select Logout, Reboot, or Shutdown
6
according to your actual situation.

95
 User's Manual

No. Icon Description

Displays Mobile Client and Device SN QR Code.
● Mobile Client: Use your mobile phone to
scan the QR code to add the device into the
Cell Phone Client, and then you can start
accessing the Device from your cell phone.
7 ● Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by
scanning the QR code. Go to the P2P
management platform and add the Device
SN into the platform. Then you can access
and manage the device in the WAN. For
details, refer to the P2P operation manual.
You can also configure P2P function in the
local configurations.

5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras

PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs overall
control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide all-around
view to the camera.

Before operating PTZ, ensure the network connection between PTZ and the Device.

5.4.1 Configuring PTZ Connection Settings

You need to configure the PTZ connection settings before use.
● Local connection: RS-485 Port for connecting speed dome or coaxial cable for connecting coaxial
camera.
● Remote connection: local area network.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERAPTZ.

96
 User's Manual
Figure 5-51 PTZ

Step 2 Configure the settings for the PTZ connection parameters.

Table 5-22 PTZ connection parameters

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to connect the PTZ
Channel
camera to.
● Local: Connect through RS-485 port or coaxial cable.
Type ● Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ
camera to the Device.
In the Control Mode list, select SerialPort or HDCVI. For HDCVI series
product, select HDCVI. The control signal is sent to the PTZ through the
Control Mode
coaxial cable. For the serial mode, the control signal is sent to the PTZ
through the RS-485 port.
In the Protocol list, select the protocol for the PTZ camera. For example,
Protocol
select HDCVI3.0.
In the Address box, enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is 1.

Address The entered address must be the same with the address configured on
the PTZ camera; otherwise the PTZ camera cannot be controlled from
the Device.

In the Baud Rate list, select the baud rate for the PTZ camera. The
Baud Rate
default is 9600.

97
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Data Bits The default value is 8.
Stop Bits The default value is 1.
Parity The default value is NONE.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

5.4.2 Working with PTZ Control Panel

PTZ control panel performs the operations such as directing camera in eight directions, adjusting
zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.

Basic PTZ Control Panel

Right-click on the live view screen and then select PTZ. The PTZ control panel is displayed.

Figure 5-52 PTZ control panel

The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.

Table 5-23 PTZ control panel description

Parameter Description
Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value is, the faster the
Speed
movement will be.
: Zoom out.
Zoom
: Zoom in.
: Focus far.
Focus
: Focus near.
: Image darker.
Iris
: Image brighter.
PTZ movement Supports eight directions.

98
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Fast positioning button.
● Positioning: Click to enter the fast positioning screen, and
then click anywhere on the live view screen, the PTZ will turn to
this point and move it to the middle of the screen.
● Zooming: On the fast positioning screen, drag to draw a square on
the view. The square supports zooming.
◇ Dragging upward is to zoom out, and dragging downward is to
zoom in.
◇ The smaller the square, the larger the zoom effect.

This function is available on select models and can only be controlled

through mouse operations.
Click , you can control the four directions (left, right, up, and down)
PTZ movement through mouse operation.
Click to open the expanded PTZ control panel.

Expanded PTZ Control Panel

On the basic PTZ control panel, click to open the expanded PTZ control panel to find more
options.

Figure 5-53 Expanded PTZ control panel

● The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.
● Right-click once to return to the page of PTZ basic control panel.

Figure 5-54 Expanded PTZ control panel description

Icon Function Icon Function
Preset Pan
Tour Flip
Pattern Reset
Click the Auxiliary Config icon to open the
Scan
PTZ functions settings page.
Click the Enter Menu icon to open the
Auxiliary
MENU OPERATION page.

99
 User's Manual

5.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions

5.4.3.1 Configuring Presets

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .

Figure 5-55 Preset

Step 2 Click the direction arrows to the required position.

Step 3 In the Preset box, enter the value to represent the required position.
Step 4 Click Setting to complete the preset settings.

5.4.3.2 Configuring Tours

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
Step 2 Click the Tour tab.

100
 User's Manual
Figure 5-56 Tour

Step 3 In the Tour No. box, enter the value for the tour route.
Step 4 In the Preset box, enter the preset value.
Step 5 Click Add Preset.
Step 6 A preset will be added for this tour.

● You can repeat adding more presets.

● Click Delete Preset to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be repeated to
delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.

5.4.3.3 Configuring Patterns

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
Step 2 Click the Pattern tab.

101
 User's Manual
Figure 5-57 Pattern

Step 3 In the Pattern box, enter the value for pattern.

Step 4 Click Start to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control Panel
to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.
Step 5 On the PTZ page, click End to complete the settings.

5.4.3.4 Configuring Scan

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
Step 2 Click the Scan tab.

Figure 5-58 Scan

Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right limits.

102
 User's Manual

5.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions

After you have configured the PTZ settings, you can call the PTZ functions for monitoring from the
expanded PTZ control panel.

Figure 5-59 Expanded PTZ control panel

5.4.4.1 Calling Presets

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the preset that you
want to call.
Step 2 Click to call the preset.
Step 3 Click again to stop calling the preset.

5.4.4.2 Calling Tours

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the tour that you
want to call.
Step 2 Click to call the tour.
Step 3 Click again to stop calling the tour.

5.4.4.3 Calling Patterns

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the pattern that you
want to call.
Step 2 Call to call the pattern.
Step 3 The PTZ camera moves according to the configured pattern repeatedly.
Step 4 Click again to stop calling the pattern.

5.4.4.4 Calling Auto Scan

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the border that you
want to call.
Step 2 Click .

103
 User's Manual
Step 3 The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the configured borders.
Step 4 Click again to stop auto scanning.

5.4.4.5 Calling Auto Pan

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click to start moving in horizontal direction.
Step 2 Click again to stop moving.

5.4.4.6 Using AUX Button

On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
● In the Shortcut Aux list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.
● In the Aux No. box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the decoder.

Figure 5-60 Auxiliary

5.4.5 Calling OSD Menu

For the coaxial camera, you can call the OSD menu through the expanded PTZ control panel.

Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .

104
 User's Manual
Figure 5-61 PTZ menu

Step 2 Click Enter.

Figure 5-62 OSD

Step 3 On the PTZ Menu page, click the arrow button to select the onscreen parameters.
Step 4 Click Enter to complete the settings.

5.5 Configuring Camera Settings

5.5.1 Configuring Image Settings

Background Information
You can configure the image settings such as saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness for each

105
 User's Manual
connected camera.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Image.

Figure 5-63 Analog channel

106
 User's Manual
Figure 5-64 Digital channel

Step 2 Configure the settings for the image parameters.

On the digital channel page, click More to display more parameters.

Table 5-24 Image settings

Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure.
In the Cable Type list, select the cable type that the camera uses.
Cable Type
This function is available on select models.

In the Period list, select a time period for the image settings. The
Period
image settings will be only used during the selected period.
Enable the effective function.
Effective Time In the Effective Time box, enter the start time and end time for the
period you selected.
Adjusts the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color
will become. This value does not influence the general image
Saturation lightness.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.

107
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Adjusts the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious
the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You
can adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the
value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light
Contrast area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to
become dim.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Adjusts the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter the
image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a
whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become
Brightness dim if the value is too big.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Adjusts the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default
Hue
value is 50.
Adjusts the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the
Sharpness more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.
The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.
Adjusts the image definition. The bigger the value is, the clearer the
Image Enhance
image will become, but there will be more noises.
Reduces the noises from image. The bigger the value is, the better the
NR
image will become.
In the Config File list, select Day, Night, Normal, or Switch By
Period. The system configures the parameters correspondingly.
● Day: Apply the configuration during daytime.
Config File ● Night: Apply the configuration during nighttime.
● Normal: Apply the configuration during day and night.
● Switch by Period: If you select this option, you need to configure
the sunrise time and sunset time where you are located.
Enable the function, the left and right side of the video image will be
Mirror
switched. It is disabled by default.
This function specially applies to the image which frame rate is
configured as 2 at least. It reduces the noises by making use of the
3D Denoise
information between two frames. The bigger the value is, the better
the effect.
● In the Flip list, you can select 180°to change the video image
Flip display.
● By default, the setting is No Flip.
In the Light list, select Close or Enable to use the backlight
Light
compensation or not.

108
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Configure the white balance to adjust the general hue of the image.
The default setting is Auto.
● Auto: Automatically apply white balance to different colors to
Scene Mode make the image color display normally.
● Sunny: Apply the threshold value to sunny environment.
● Night: Apply the threshold value to night.
● Customized: Manually adjust the Red Gain and Blue Gain values.
Configure the color and black&white mode of the image. This setting
is not affected by the configuration files. The default setting is Auto.
● Color: The camera outputs color image only.
● Auto: Depends on the camera, such as overall brightness and
Day & Night whether there is an IR light, either color image or black&white
image is output.
● B/W: The camera outputs Black and white image only.
● By Time: The camera outputs image according to the configured
sunrise time and sunset time.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.5.2 Configuring Encode Settings

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Audio/Video.

109
 User's Manual
Figure 5-65 Audio/video

Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters.

Table 5-25 Main/sub stream parameters

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the
Channel
settings for.
● General: Uses general coding strategy.
● Smart Codec: Enables the smart codec function. This function can
reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to
Coding Strategy maximize the storage space.
● AI Codec: Enables the AI codec function. This function can reduce
the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize
the storage space.
● Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, Motion, or Alarm.
Type
● Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.
In the Compression list, select the encode mode.
● H.265: Main profile encoding. This setting is recommended.
● H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high definition.
Compression
● H.264: General profile encoding.
● H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher bit
stream compared with other settings for the same definition.

110
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.
Resolution The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your
device model.
Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value, the
clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along
with the resolution.
Frame Rate (FPS) Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in
NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30. However, the
specific range of frame rate that you can select depends on the
capability of the Device.
This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List.
Quality
The higher the value, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval The interval between two reference frames.
In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to change
Bit Rate (Kb/S) the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will
become.
Video Enable the function for sub stream.
Audio Click More, the More page is displayed.
Audio Source ● Audio: This function is enabled by default for main stream. You need
to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled,
the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream.
● Audio Source: In the Audio Source list, you can select LOCAL and
Compression
HDCVI.
● Audio Format: In the Compression list, select a format that you
need.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

5.5.3 Configuring Snapshot Settings

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.

111
 User's Manual
Figure 5-66 Snapshot

Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters.

Table 5-26 Snapshot parameters

Parameter Description
In the Manual Snapshot list, select how many snapshots you want
Manual Snapshot
to take each time.
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure
Channel
the settings for.
In the Type list, you can select Scheduled Event, or Face
Snapshot as the event type for which you want to take a snapshot.
● Scheduled: The snapshot is taken during the scheduled
period.
● Event: The snapshot is taken when there is an alarm event
Type
occurs, such as motion detection event, video loss, and local
alarms.
● Face Snapshot: The snapshot is taken when the face is
detected. The face detection function is support only with the
Channel 1.
In the Size list, select a value for the image. The bigger the value is,
Size
the better the image will become.
Configures the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the
Quality
better the image will become.

112
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Configures or customizes the snapshot frequency. You can select 1
Interval second per one snapshot to 7 seconds per one snapshot. The
maximum is 3600 seconds per one snapshot.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

5.5.4 Configuring Encode Enhancement

You can enable this function and get more FPS in encode settings (see "5.5.2 Configuring Encode
Settings"). In the meantime, you will not be able to use extra screen function (see "5.2.8.1
Configuring Display Settings") and AI functions (see "5.11 AI Function").
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Encode Enhancement.

Figure 5-67 Encode enhancement

Click the switch to enable it.

When connecting to the new generation 4K cameras, you can enable 4K-N to switch 4K non-live
view to 4K-N live view and encoding.

113
 User's Manual

5.5.5 Configuring Overlay Settings

Background Information
You can configure to display system time and channel name on each channel window in the live
view screen.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay > Overlay.

Figure 5-68 Overlay

Step 2 Configure the settings for the text overlay parameters.

Table 5-27 Overlay parameters

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the
Channel
settings for.
Select the Time Title checkbox to display the system time on each
Time Title channel window in the live view screen.
In the Time Title list, select time display style.
Select the Channel Title checkbox to display the channel name on each
Channel Title channel window in the live view screen.
In the Channel Title box, enter the name for the selected channel.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

114
 User's Manual

Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

5.5.6 Configuring Covered Area Settings

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay > Privacy Masking.

Figure 5-69 Privacy masking

Step 2 Configure the settings for the covered area parameters.

Table 5-28 Covered area parameters

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings
Channel
for.

115
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Live ● Preview: Select the Live checkbox to apply the configured covered block
to the selected channel window in the live view screen.
● Record: Select the Record checkbox to apply the configured covered
block to the selected channel window during recording.
To configure covering block, do the following:
1. Select the Live checkbox or the Record checkbox, or select the both. The
Record
"1, 2, 3, 4" buttons are activated.
2. Click the buttons to select blocks.
3. A triangle solid black block is displayed.
4. Drag the block to the area that you want to cover and adjust the size of
the block. You can configure total 4 covered blocks.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.5.7 Configuring Channel Type

You can configure the channel type as Analog or IP channel.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Channel Type.

Figure 5-70 Channel type

Step 2 Configure the channels.

116
 User's Manual
● Analog Channel: Select the transmission medium such as CVI, AHD, CVBS, and then
follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.
● IP Channel: You can enable the IP channels by disabling the corresponding analog
channels. The Device also provides expanded IP channels for your use, such as the 17–
64channels in 0.

● The 17–64 channels are only for IP camera and the range changes dependent on the
model you purchased.
● The channel selection for analog camera or IP camera are in sequence, for example, if
you want to select channels for IP camera, you need to select from the last channel
number Channel 16 first, which means, you cannot go to select the channel 15 directly
until you have selected the channel 16.
Step 3 Click Apply and follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.

5.5.8 Upgrading Coaxial Camera

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > HDVCI Update.

Figure 5-71 Update

Step 2 Click Browse.

Step 3 Select the upgrade file and then click OK.

117
 User's Manual

You need to insert the USB storage device that contains the upgrading files.
Step 4 Select the checkbox of the channel that you want to upgrade.
Step 5 Click Update.
Step 6 If the upgrading is successful, the system pops up a message indicating the upgrading is
completed.

5.6 Configuring Remote Devices

5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices

This function is available after you have configured the channel type as IP channel as described in
previous section, see "5.5.7 Configuring Channel Type".
You can add remote devices by adding the IP address.
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Add Camera.

Figure 5-72 Add camera

118
 User's Manual
Table 5-29 Parameters
Parameter Description
Enable the Uninitialized function, the uninitialized devices out of
Uninitialized
the searched devices are displayed in the searched device list.
Select the uninitialized device from the uninitialized device list, and
Initialize
the click Initialize to start initializing device.
In the Filter list, select the remote device type that you want to
display in the searched device list.
● None: Display all types of devices.
Filter ● IPC: Display the front-end devices.
● DVR: Display all storage devices such as NVR, DVR and HCVR.
● OTHER: Display the devices that do not belong to IPC or DVR
type.
Displays the searched devices. You can view the device information
Searched Device List
such as status, IP address.
Click Search, the searched devices display in the searched device
list.
To adjust the display sequence, in the title line, you can click the IP
address, Type or Device Name text. For example, click the IP address
Search
text, the sequence icon is displayed.

"*" is displayed next to the added device.

In the Searched Device List area, select the device that you want to
Add
add.
Add the device by manually configuring settings such as IP address,
Manual Add
channel selection.
Displays the added devices. You can edit and delete the device, and
Added Device List
view the device information.
Select the checkbox of the added device, and then click Delete to
Delete
delete the added device.
Select the searched devices and then click Import to import the
Import
devices in batches.
Select the added devices and then click Export. The exported
Export
devices information is saved into the USB storage device.

5.6.1.1 Initializing Remote Devices

You can reset the password and IP address of the remote devices through initializing.

Procedure
Step 1 Click Search Device.
The devices found are displayed in the table.

119
 User's Manual
Figure 5-73 Search result

Step 2 Enable the Initialized function.

The uninitialized devices are displayed.

120
 User's Manual
Figure 5-74 Uninitialized devices

Step 3 Select the uninitialized device that you want to initialize.

Step 4 Click Initialize.

121
 User's Manual
Figure 5-75 Enter password

Step 5 Configure the password and email information.

If you select the Using current device password and email info checkbox, the remote
device automatically uses the current password and email information, so you do not need
to set the password and email address again and can skip this step.
1) Clear the Using current device password and email info checkbox.

122
 User's Manual
Figure 5-76 Password setting

2) Configure the settings for the password setting parameters.

Table 5-30 Password parameters

Parameter Description
User The default is admin.
Password The password must consist of 8–32 non-blank characters and contain
at least two types of the following characters: uppercase, lowercase,
numbers, and special characters (excluding ' " ; : &).
Confirm Password Enter a strong password according to the password strength bar
indication.
3) Click Next.

123
 User's Manual
Figure 5-77 Password protection

4) Select the Email Address box and enter the email address that you want to reserve for
password reset in the future.

If you do not want to set the reserved email address, click Skip.
Step 6 Click Next.

Figure 5-78 Network

Step 7 Configure the IP address.

124
 User's Manual
● Select the DHCP checkbox, you do not need to enter the IP address information,
because the system will allocate one IP address to the remote device.
● Select the STATIC checkbox, you need to enter the IP address, subnet mast, default
gateway, and incremental value. The system will allocate the IP address to the remote
devices by progressively increasing the last part of the IP address when initializing
devices in batches.

When configuring IP address for multiple remote devices which were not in the same
network segment, these remote devices will belong to the same network segment after
configuration.
Step 8 Click Next.
The initializing is started.

Figure 5-79 Initialization finished

Step 9 Click Finished to complete the settings.

5.6.1.2 Adding Remote Devices Automatically

Procedure
Step 1 On the Registration page, click Device Search
The devices found are displayed.

125
 User's Manual
Figure 5-80 Search device

Step 2 Select the checkbox of the device.

Step 3 Click Add.
The device is added into the Added Device area.

● You can also double-click the device to add it into the Added Device area.
● You can add devices in batches.

5.6.1.3 Adding Remote Devices Manually

Procedure
Step 1 On the Add Camera page, click Manual Add.

126
 User's Manual
Figure 5-81 Manual add

Step 2 Configure the settings for the manual adding device parameters.

Table 5-31 Manual add parameters

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want use on the Device to
Channel
connect the remote device.
Manufacturer In the Manufacturer list, select the manufacturer of the remote device.
In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of remote device.
IP Address
The default is 192.168.0.0 which the system cannot connect to.

The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your
RTSP Port
actual situation.
The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your
actual situation.
HTTP Port
If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70
after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
The default value setting is 37777. You can enter the value according to
TCP Port
your actual situation.
Username Enter the username of the remote device.
Password Enter the password of the user for the remote device.

127
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enter the remote channel number of the remote device that you want to
Remote CH No.
add.
Decoder Strategy In the Decoder Strategy list, select Default, Realtime, or Fluent.
● If the remote device is added through private protocol, the default
type is TCP.
● If the remote device is added through ONVIF protocol, the system
Protocol Type
supports Auto, TCP, UDP, or MULTICAST.
● If the remote device is added through other manufacturers, the
system supports TCP and UDP.
If the remote device is added through ONVIF protocol, enabling the
Encryption checkbox will provide encryption protection to the data being
transmitted.
Encryption
To use this function, the HTTPS function should be enabled for the
remote IP camera.
Step 3 Click OK to save the settings.

● Only one device can be added manually at one time.

● indicates successful connection and indicates connection failed.

5.6.1.4 Modifying or Deleting Remote Devices

You can modify and delete the added devices.
● Modify the remote devices
1. Click or double-click a device.

128
 User's Manual
Figure 5-82 Modify

2. In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to modify settings for.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
● Delete the remote devices one by one or in batches
◇ Click to delete one device.
◇ Select the checkbox of the devices that you want to delete, and then click Delete.

5.6.1.5 Modifying IP Address

You can modify a single IP address or multiple IP addresses of remote devices at one time.

You can only modify the IP address of initialized cameras.

● Modify a single IP address
1. In the Searched Device list area, click for the device that you want to modify IP.

129
 User's Manual
Figure 5-83 Modify IP

2. Configure the settings for IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, username, and password.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
● Modify IP address in batches
1. In the Searched Device list area, select the devices that you want to modify IP address in
batches.
2. Click .

130
 User's Manual
Figure 5-84 Modify IP

3. Set incremental value.

The system will add the incremental value to the fourth segment of IP addresses of selected
devices.
4. Configure the settings for start IP address (the IP address is allocated in sequence), subnet
mask, default gateway, username, and password.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

5.6.1.6 Exporting IP Address

You can export the added IP address to the USB storage device.

The exported information is saved in .csv file, which includes IP address, port number, channel
number, manufacturer, username, and password.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Click Export.

131
 User's Manual
Figure 5-85 Browse

Step 3 Configure the save path.

Step 4 Click OK to save the settings.
A pop-up message indicating "Successfully exported" is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK.

When exporting IP address, the Backup Encryption checkbox is selected by default. The
file information includes IP address, port, channel number, manufacturer, username, and
password.
● If you select the Backup Encryption checkbox, the file format is .backup.
● If you clear the Backup Encryption checkbox, the file format is .csv. In this case, there
might be a risk of data leakage.

5.6.1.7 Importing IP Address

You can add remote devices by importing IP address information.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Click Import.

132
 User's Manual
Figure 5-86 Browse

Step 3 Select the file that you want to import.

Step 4 Click OKto start importing.
Step 5 After importing is completed, a pop-up message indicating "The import succeeded" is
displayed.

If the IP address that you want to import already exists in the Device, the system will pop
up a message to ask you whether to overwrite the existing content.
● Click OK to replace the existing one.
● Click Cancel to add it as a separate device in the Added Device area.

● You can edit the exported .csv file and be cautious not to change the file format;
otherwise the file cannot be imported as it will be judged as invalid.
● The language of .csv file must match the Device language.
● The import and export through customized protocol is not supported.

5.6.2 Managing Remote Devices

You can view the status of remote devices and upgrade.

5.6.2.1 Viewing Status

You can view the device information such as connection status, IP address, motion detection, video
loss detection, camera name, and manufacturer.

133
 User's Manual
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Status.

5.6.2.2 Viewing Firmware Information

You can view the device firmware information such as channel number, IP address, manufacturer,
system version, video input, audio input, and alarm in.
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Firmware.

Figure 5-87 Firmware

5.6.2.3 Upgrading Remote Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Update.

134
 User's Manual
Figure 5-88 Update

Step 2 Upgrade the device.

● File Update
1. Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the
Device.
2. Select the devices that you want to upgrade.
3. Click File Update.
4. Select the upgrading files and click Apply.
● Online Update
1. Click Detect or select the checkbox the device that you want to upgrade and click
Manual Check.
The system starts detecting if there is a new version on the online server.
2. Select the checkbox of all the devices that have new version.
3. Click Online Update.

◇ The system will pop up a message to indicate if the upgrading is successful.

◇ You can use the Type list to filter the devices so that you can find the devices
quickly.

135
 User's Manual

5.7 Configuring Record Settings

You can record video manually or automatically and configure the recording settings to main stream
and sub stream respectively.

5.7.1 Enabling Record Control

● Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access STORAGE settings.
● Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu,
select Manual Control > Record Control.

Figure 5-89 Record mode

Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters.

Table 5-32 Record control parameters

Parameter Description
Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels. You
Channel
can select a single channel or select All.

136
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
● Auto: Automatically record according to the record type and
recording time as configured in the recording schedule.
Main Stream/Sub
● Manual: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected
Stream
channel.
● Stop: Do not record.
Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding
Snapshot
channels.
Step 3 Click Apply.

5.7.2 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule

You need to configure the storage schedule for the recorded video so that the recorded video can
be saved. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule".

5.8 Configuring Snapshot Settings

5.8.1 Configuring Snapshot Trigger

The snapshot is divided into scheduled snapshot, event triggered snapshot, and face detection
triggered snapshot. When the both are enabled, the event triggered snapshot has the priority.
● If there is no alarm event, the system performs scheduled snapshot.
● If there is any alarm event, the system performs event triggered snapshot.

5.8.1.1 Configuring Scheduled Snapshot

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed.
Step 2 On the shortcut menu, select Manual Control > Record Control.
Step 3 In the Snapshot area, enable the snapshot for the channels if needed.

137
 User's Manual
Figure 5-90 Enable snapshot

Step 4 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.
Step 5 In the Type list, select Scheduled, and then configure other parameters.

Figure 5-91 Type list

Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.

● If you have configured the snapshot schedule, the configuration has been completed.
● If you have not configured the snapshot schedule, see "5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot
Storage Schedule".

5.8.1.2 Configuring Event Triggered Snapshot

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Snapshot > Encode.

138
 User's Manual
Step 2 In the Type list, select Event, and then configure other parameters.

Figure 5-92 Event

Step 3 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection, and select the event type to configure,
for example, select the Motion Detection tab.

Figure 5-93 Motion detection

Step 4 Click Setting next to Picture Storage checkbox and select the corresponding channel.
Step 5 Click Apply.

5.8.2 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule

You need to configure the storage schedule for the snapshot so that the snapshot can be saved. For

139
 User's Manual
details, see "5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule".

5.8.3 Backing up Snapshots to FTP

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > FTP.

Figure 5-94 FTP

Step 2 Enable the FTP function and configure the parameters. For details, see "5.18.9 Configuring
FTP Storage Settings".
The snapshots will be uploaded to FTP for backup.

5.9 Playing Back Video

5.9.1 Enabling Record Control

● Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access STORAGE settings.
● Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu,

140
 User's Manual
select Manual Control > Record Mode.

Figure 5-95 Record mode

Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters.

Table 5-33 Record control parameters

Parameter Description
Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital
Channel
channels. You can select a single channel or select All.
● Auto: Automatically record according to the record type and
recording time as configured in the recording schedule.
Main Stream/Sub Stream ● Manual: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected
channel.
● Stop: Do not record.
Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding
Snapshot
channels.

5.9.2 Instant Playback

You can use the instant playback function to play back the previous 5 seconds to 60 minutes of the
recorded video in any channel. For details about instant playback function, see ."5.2.2.1 Instant
Playback".

141
 User's Manual

5.9.3 Video Playback

You can search for and play back the recorded video saved on the Device.
Select Main Menu > Search.

Figure 5-96 Video search

Figure 5-97 Video search description

No. Function Description
Display the searched recorded video or picture. Supports
simultaneously playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-
channel, and 16-channel.

1 Display Window When playing back in a single channel, click and hold to
select the area that you want to enlarge. The area is
enlarged after the left mouse button is released. To exit the
enlarged status, right-click on the image.

2 Playback Controls Bar Playback control buttons.

142
 User's Manual

No. Function Description

Display the type and time period of the current recorded
video.
● In the 4-channel layout, there are four time bars are
displayed; in the other view layouts, only one time bar
is displayed.
● Click on the colored area to start playback from a
certain time.
● In the situation when you are configuring the settings,
rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is
zooming in from 0. In the situation when playback is
ongoing, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the
time bar is zooming from the time point where the
playback is located.
● Time bar colors: Green indicates general type; Red
indicates external alarm; Yellow indicates motion
detection; Blue indicates intelligent events; Purple
3 Time Bar indicates POS events.
● For some models, when you are clicking on the blank
area in the time bar, the system automatically jumps to
the next time point where there is a recorded video
located.
● Click and hold the time bar, and the mouse pointer
shall change to a hand icon, and then you can drag to
view the playback of the target time.
● You can drag the vertical orange line on the time bar to
rapidly view the playback in iframe format.
● When playing back video in one channel mode, you can
move mouse pointer to time bar to display thumbnail
pictures for the video of target time.
● When playing back video, you can select other channels
as needed. The time bar of newly added channels will
be added up to the time bar of earlier base channels.
The type and time period of newly added channels are
the same with early base channels.
4 Play Status Includes two playback status: Play and Stop.
Select the checkbox to define the recording type to search
5 Record type
for.
Select the content to play back: Record, Picture,
6 Search type
Subperiod.
Click the date that you want to search, the time bar displays
the corresponding record.
7 Calendar
The dates with record or snapshot have a small solid circle
under the date.

143
 User's Manual

No. Function Description

● In the Camera Name list, select the channel(s) that you
want to play back.
● The window split is decided by how you select the
channel(s). For example, if you select one channel, the
View Layout and
8 playback is displayed in the single-channel view; if you
Channel Selection
select two to four channels, the playback is displayed in
the four-channel view. The maximum is eight channels.
● Click to switch the streams. indicates main
stream, and indicates sub stream.
9 Video Splice Splice a section of recorded video and save it.
10 Backup Back up the recorded video files.
This area includes Tag List and File List.
● : Click the Tag List button, the marked recorded
video list is displayed. Double-click the file to start
11 List Display
playing.
● : Click the File List button, the searched recorded
video list is displayed. You can lock the files.
Click to display in full screen. In the full screen mode,
12 Full Screen point to the bottom of the screen, the time bar is displayed.
Right-click on the screen to exit full screen mode.
You can select 24 hr, 2 hr, 1 hr, or 30 min as the unit of time
13 Time Bar Unit
bar. The time bar display changes with the setting.

5.9.3.1 Introducing Playback Controls Bar

You can perform the operations such as control the speed of playback, add mark, and take snapshots
through the playback controls bar.

Figure 5-98 Playback control bar

The play backward function and playback speed are dependent on the product version. The actual
product shall govern. You can also contact the technical support to consult the hardware version
information.

Table 5-34 Playback control bar description

Icon Function
Play/Pause.
,
During playing back, you can switch between play and pause.
Stop.
During playing back, you can click the Stop button to stop playback.

144
 User's Manual

Icon Function
Play backward.
● During playing back, click the Play Backward button to backward play the
, recorded video, the button switches to ; click to stop playing
backward.
● During playing back, click to start playing forward.

Previous and next frame.

● When the playback is paused, click or click to play single-frame
, recorded video.
● When playing back single-frame recorded video, click to start playing
forward.
Slow playback.
● During playing back, click to set the speed of slow playback as
SlowX1/2, SlowX1/4, SlowX1/8, or SlowX1/16.
● During fast playback, click to slow down the speed of fast playback.

Fast playback.
● During playing back, click to set the speed of fast playback as FastX2,
FastX4, FastX8, or FastX16.
● During slow playback, click to speed up slow playback.

Previous day and next day.

, Click or click to play the previous day or next day of the current
recorded video.
Adjust volume of playback.
Enable smart search function.
Add filter criteria of smart search. You can select Human, Vehicle, or uncheck.

In the full screen mode, click to take a snapshot and save into the USB
storage device or mobile HDD.
Add tag for the recorded view.
Show or hide POS information.
During single-channel playback, click to show or hide POS information on
the screen.
During playback, click this icon to display or hide AI rulers.
Show playback video in full screen.

5.9.3.2 Selecting Search Type

You can search the recorded videos, splice, or snapshots from HDD or external storage device.
● From R/W Disk: Recorded videos or snapshots playback from HDD of the Device.

145
 User's Manual
Figure 5-99 From R/W disk

● From I/O Device: Recorded videos playback from external storage device.
● Click Browse, select the save path of recorded video file that you want to play. Double-click the
video file or click to start playing.

Figure 5-100 From I/O device

5.9.3.3 Clipping Recorded Video

During playback, clip sections of recorded video and save to the USB storage device.

Figure 5-101 Clip

Procedure
Step 1 Select a recorded video that you want to play.
● Click to start playing from the beginning.
● Double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.
Step 2 Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click to start clipping.
Step 3 Click on the time bar to select the end time, and then click to stop clipping.
Step 4 Click .

● You can clip the video of a single-channel or multiple channels.

● Maximum 1024 files can be backed up at one time.
● The files that are selected in the File List cannot be clipped.

5.9.3.4 Backing up Recorded Video

You can back up the recorded video file or splice video file into the USB storage device.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the recorded video file that you want to back up. You can select the following two
types of files:
● Recorded video file: Click , the File List area is displayed. Select the file(s) that you
want to back up.
● Splice video file. For details about splicing video file, see "5.9.3.3 Clipping Recorded
Video".

146
 User's Manual
Step 2 Click .

Figure 5-102 Backup

Step 3 Click Backup.

If you do not want to back the file, clear the checkbox.

5.9.4 Smart Search

During playback, you can analyze a certain area to find if there was any motion detection event
occurred. The system will display the images with motion events of the recorded video.

This function is available on select models.

To use the Smart Search function, you need to enable the motion detection for the channel by
selecting Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Motion Detection.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Camera Name list, select the channel(s) that you want to play.
Step 3 Click or double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.
Step 4 Click .
The grid is displayed on the screen.

● Only single-channel supports smart search.

147
 User's Manual
● If multi-channels are selected, double-click on the channel window to display this
channel only on the screen, and then you can start using smart search function.
Step 5 Drag the pointer to select the searching area.

The grid area supports 22 × 18 (PAL) and 22 × 15 (NTSC).

Step 6 Click to add filter criteria. You can check Human box, Vehicle box, or uncheck.
● Human: Display the motion alarm of human during selected time and searching area.
● Vehicle: Display the motion alarm of vehicle during selected time and searching area.
● Unchecking: Display the general motion alarm which includes both human and vehicle,
during selected time and searching area.
Step 7 Click .
Step 8 The screen starts playing back the motional splices of recorded video for the selected
searching area.
Step 9 Click to exit the smart searching while playback.

5.9.5 Showing AI Rule during Playback

Background Information
To use the AI rule showing function, do the following:

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Camera Name list, select the channel(s) that you want to play.
Step 3 Click or double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.
You can see the AI rule during playback. This function is enabled by default.

Figure 5-103 Playback

148
 User's Manual

Click to hide AI rule.

5.9.6 Marking and Playing Back Video

You can mark the recording for somewhere important. Then you can easily find the marked
recording by searching time and mark name.

Marking a Video
1. Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
2. In the playback mode, click .

Figure 5-104 Add tag

3. In theTag Name box, enter a name.

4. Click OK.
This marked video file displays in the Tag List.

Playing back Marked Video

This function is supported on single-channel playback.

1. In the Camera Name list, select one channel.
2. Click .

149
 User's Manual
Figure 5-105 Mark list

3. Double-click the file that you want to play back.

4. To search the marked video by time, in the SEARCH box on the top of the page, enter the time,
and then click .

Playing back Time before the Tag

You can configure to play N seconds of the tagged video before the tagged time.
1. In the Tag Name box, enter the name of a tagged video.
2. In the Interval Before Tag box, enter N seconds.
3. Click .
The playback starts from N seconds before the tagged time.

If there is N seconds exist before the marked time, the playback starts from N seconds before the
tagged time. If there is not, it plays back as much as there is.

Managing Tagged Video

On the Tag List page, click .

150
 User's Manual
Figure 5-106 Tag management

● Be default, it manages all the tagged videos of the selected channel.

● To search the tagged video, select channel number from the Channel list, enter time in Start
Time box and End Time box, and then click Search.
● All the tagged videos display in time order.
● To modify the name of tagged video, double-click a tagged video, the Modify Tag dialog box is
displayed.
● To delete the marked video, select the tagged video, and then click Delete.

After opening the Tag Management page, the playback will pause until exiting this page. If the
marked video that was in playing back is deleted, the playback will start from the first tagged video
in the Tag List.

5.9.7 Playing Back Snapshots

You can search and play back the snapshots.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Search Type list, select Picture.
Step 3 In the Channel list, select a channel number.
Step 4 In the Calendar area, select a date.
Step 5 Click .
The system starts playing snapshots according to the configured intervals.

151
 User's Manual

5.9.8 Playing Back Splices

You can clip the recorded video files into splices and then play back at the same time to save your
time.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Search Type list, select Subperiod; In the Split Mode list, select 4, 9, or 16.

Figure 5-107 Subperiod

Step 3 In the Calendar area, select a date.

Step 4 In the Camera Name list, select a channel.

Only single-channel supports this function.

Step 5 Start playing back splices.
● Click , the playback starts from the beginning.
● Double-click anywhere on the time bar, the playback starts from where you click.

Figure 5-108 Time bar

Every recorded video file must be at least five minutes. If a recorded video file is less than
20 minutes but still choose to split into four windows, the system will automatically adjust
the windows quantity to ensure every splice is more than five minutes, and in this case it is
possible that there are no images are displaying in some windows.

5.9.9 Using the File List

You can view all the recorded videos within a certain period from any channel in the File List.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > VIDEO.
Step 2 Select a channel(s).
Step 3 Click .

152
 User's Manual
Figure 5-109 File list

Step 4 Start playback.

● Click , the playback starts from the first file by default.
● Click any file, the system plays back this file.

153
 User's Manual

● In the time box on the top of the file list page, you can enter the specific time to search
the file that you want to view.
● In the File List area, there are 128 files can be displayed.
● File type: R indicates general recorded video; A indicates recorded video with external
alarms; M indicates recorded video with motion detection events; I indicates recorded
video with intelligent vents.
● Click to return to the page with calendar and CAM NAME list.

Related Operations
● To lock the recorded video, on the File List page, select the checkbox of the recorded video, and
then click . The locked video will not be covered.
● To view the locked information, click .

The recorded video that is under writing or overwriting cannot be locked.

● To unlock the recorded video, in the File Lock page, select the video, and then click Unlock.

Figure 5-110 File lock

5.10 Alarm Events Settings

5.10.1 Alarm Information

You can search, view and back up the alarm information.

154
 User's Manual

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm Info.

Figure 5-111 Alarm info

Step 2 In the Type list, select the event type; In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the
specific time.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search results are displayed.
Step 4 Click Backup to back up the search results into the external storage device.

● Click to play the recorded video of alarm event.

● Select an event and click Details to view the detailed information of the event.

5.10.2 Alarm Input Settings

Connect the alarm input and output ports by referring to . You can configure the alarm settings for
each channel individually or apply the settings to all channels and then save the settings."4.3
Connecting to Alarm Input and Output".

5.10.2.1 Configuring Local Alarms

You can connect the alarm device to the alarm input port of the Device. When the alarm is activated

155
 User's Manual
on the alarm device, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device
outputs the local alarms in the way that you configure in this section.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > Local.

Figure 5-112 Local

Step 2 Configure the settings for the local alarms.

Table 5-35 Local alarm settings

Parameter Description
Alarm-in Port Select the channel number.
Alarm Name Enter the customized alarm name.
Enable Enable or disable the local alarm function.
In the Device Type list, select NO or select NC as the voltage output
Device Type
type.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
Schedule Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1 Configuring Motion Detection Settings".
Configure the time period from end of event detection to the stop
Anti-Dither
of alarm.

156
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
Alarm-out Port ● Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
● Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after
Post-Alarm the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up message in
Show Message
your local host PC.
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to upload
Report Alarm the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an
alarm event occurs.
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
Record Channel
The recording for local alarm recording and auto recording must
be enabled.

Click Setting to display the PTZ page.

PTZ Linkage Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording
Post Record after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Tour Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected channels.
Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
Picture Storage
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.

Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event

occurs, the extra screen outputs the settings configured in Main
Menu > DISPLAY > Tour Setting > Sub Screen.
Sub Screen

● This function is available on select models.

● To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.

157
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in
Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour Setting.
Video Matrix

This function is available on select models.

Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.

Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm
Log
log.
After enabling this function, you can connect a switch to the alarm
Disarming
input port for disarming control.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.

● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want
to copy the local alarm settings to, and then click Apply.

5.10.2.2 Configuring Alarms from Alarm Box

You can connect the alarm box to the RS-485 port of the Device. When the alarm is detected by the
alarm box, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the
alarms in the way that you configure in this section.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > Alarm Box.

158
 User's Manual
Figure 5-113 Alarm box

Step 2 In the Alarm Box list, select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number
configured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.
Step 3 In the Alarm-in Port list, select the alarm input port on the Alarm Box.
Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box.
Step 5 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Default to restore the default setting.

5.10.2.3 Configuring Alarms from External IP Cameras

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > CAM Ext.

159
 User's Manual
Figure 5-114 CAM ext

Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the external IPC.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.

● Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
● Click Refresh to refresh configured settings.

5.10.2.4 Configuring Alarms for IP Camera Offline

You can configure the alarm settings for the situation when the IP camera is offline.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > CAM Offline.

160
 User's Manual
Figure 5-115 CAM offline

Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the offline IPC.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.

● Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

5.10.2.5 Configuring Alarms from HDCVI Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > HDCVI Alarm.

161
 User's Manual
Figure 5-116 HDCVI alarm

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel or All.

Step 3 Click .
Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.10.3 Alarm Output Settings

5.10.3.1 Configuring Alarm Output

When the Device activates alarms, the connected alarm device generates alarms in the way that you
can configure in this section. You can connect to the output port of the Device or connect wirelessly.
● Auto: When an alarm event is triggered on the Device, the connected alarm device generates
alarms.
● Manual: The alarm device is forced to keep generating alarms.
● Stop: The alarm output function is not enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Alarm Mode.

162
 User's Manual
Figure 5-117 Alarm mode

Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm output.

Table 5-36 Alarm output settings

Parameter Description
Alarm Type Select alarm type for each alarm output port.
Local Alarm
Status Indicates the status of each alarm output port.
Select the alarm box number corresponding to the
Alarm Box address number configured by the DIP switch on the
Alarm Box.
Extension Alarm
Alarm Type Select the alarm type for each alarm output ports.
Status Indicates the status of each alarm output port.
Alarm Reset Click OK to clear all alarm output status.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

5.10.3.2 Configuring Warning Light

When the motion detection alarm is activated, the system links the camera to generate warning light
alarm.

To use this function, connect at least one warning light camera to your Device.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Warning Light.

163
 User's Manual
Figure 5-118 Warning light

Step 2 Configure the settings for the warning light parameters.

Table 5-37 Warning light parameters

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select a channel that is connected to a warning
Channel
light camera.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after
Delay the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 30
seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds.
Mode Set the alarm mode of warning light to be Always on or Flicker.
When setting the alarm mode of warning light to be Flash, you can
Flicker Frequency
select the flash frequency from Low, Middle, and High.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.10.3.3 Configuring Siren

When the motion detection alarm is activated, the system links the camera to generate sound alarm.

To use this function, connect at least one camera that supports audio function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Siren.

164
 User's Manual
Figure 5-119 Siren

Step 2 Configure the settings for the siren parameters.

Table 5-38 Siren parameters

Parameter Description
In the Channel list, select a channel that is connected to a camera that
Channel
supports audio function.
Play Click Play to manually trigger the IP camera to play audio file.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the
Delay alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 30 seconds, and
the default value is 5 seconds.
Audio Clip Select the audio clip for the siren sound. The default setting is Clip 1.
Select the volume for the audio clip. You can select the flash frequency
Volume
from Low, Middle, and High.
Import the upgrade audio file (.bin or .wav) to upgrade the alarm audio
Update Audio Clip
file of the camera.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Related Operations
You can update the audio files of the camera on the local interface.
1. Prepare a USB device or other external storage device and plug it into the Device.
2. Click Browse.
3. Select the upgrade audio file (.bin or .wav).
4. Click OK to return to the Siren page.
5. Click Upgrade to upgrade the alarm audio file of the camera.

165
 User's Manual
Figure 5-120 Browse

5.10.3.4 Configuring Smart Illumination

The linkage action of smart illumination can extend for a period after the event ends.

To use this function, connect a camera that supports smart illumination.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Smart Illumination.

Figure 5-121 Smart illumination

Step 2 Select a channel and then set the delay time.

Step 3 Click Apply.
The illuminator remains on during the delay period after the linked event ends.

166
 User's Manual

5.10.4 Video Detection

Video detection adopts computer vision and image processing technology. The technology analyzes
the video images to detect the obvious changes such as moving objects and blurriness. The system
activates alarms when such changes are detected.

5.10.4.1 Configuring Motion Detection Settings

When the moving object appears and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value, the
system activates the alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Motion Detection.

Figure 5-122 Motion

Step 2 Configure the settings for the motion detection parameters.

Table 5-39 Motion detection parameters

Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to set the motion detection.
Region Click Setting to define the motion detection region.
Enable Enable or disable the motion detection function.

167
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion
detect. It can filter the meaningless alarms that are activated by the
objects such as falling leaves, flies. The detection range by PIR is
smaller than the field angle.
PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras.
Enabling PIR function will get the motion detect to be enabled
automatically to generate motion detection alarms; if the PIR function
PIR Alarm is not enabled, the motion detect just has the general effect.

● Only when the channel type is CVI, the PIR function can be
enabled.
● If the camera does not support PIR function, it will be unusable.
● If the Device does not support PIR function, it will not be
displayed on the page.
Schedule Define a period during which the motion detection is active.
Configure the time period from end of event detection to the stop of
Anti-Dither
alarm.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
Alarm-out Port ● External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected
alarm box.
● Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the
external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300
Post-Alarm
seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will
be no delay.
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up message in
Show Message
your local host PC.
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to upload
Report Alarm the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an
alarm event occurs.
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s)
starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
Record Channel
The recording for motion detection and auto recording function
must be enabled.

168
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
PTZ Linkage
Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.

Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after
Post Record the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300
seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Tour Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected channels.
Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
Picture Storage
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.

Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event

occurs, the extra screen outputs the settings configured in Main
Menu > DISPLAY > Tour > Sub Screen.
Sub Screen

● This function is available on select models.

● To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in Main
Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.
Video Matrix

This function is available on select models.

Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.

Log Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Select to enable audio broadcast/alarm tones in response to a motion
Alarm Tone
detection event.
Warning Light Select the checkbox to enable warning light alarm of the camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable sound alarm of the camera.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.

● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want
to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.
● Click Test to test the settings.

5.10.4.1.1 Setting the Motion Detection Region

Procedure
Step 1 Next to Region, click Setting.
Step 2 Point to the middle top of the page.

169
 User's Manual
Figure 5-123 Detection setting

Step 3 Configure the regions settings. You can configure totally four regions.
1. Select one region, for example, click .
2. Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.
The selected area shows the color that represents the region.
3. Configure the parameters.

Table 5-40 Detection region setting

Parameter Description
Name Enter a name for the region.
Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value.
Sensitivity
The bigger the value is, the easier the alarms can be activated.
Adjust the threshold for motion detect. Every region of every
Threshold
channel has an individual threshold.

When anyone of the four regions activates motion detect alarm, the channel where this
region belongs to will activate motion detect alarm.
Step 4 Right-click on the screen to exit the region setting page.
Step 5 On the Motion Detection page, click Apply to complete the settings.

5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.

Procedure
Step 1 Next to Schedule, click Setting.

170
 User's Manual
Figure 5-124 Setting

Step 2 Define the motion detection period. By default, it is active all the time.
● Define the period by drawing.
● Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.
1) Click .

Figure 5-125 Period

2) Enter the time frame for the period, and then select the checkbox to enable the
settings.
3) Click OK to save the settings.
Step 3 On the Motion Detection page, click Apply to complete the settings.

5.10.4.2 Configuring Video Loss Settings

When the video loss occurs, the system activates the alarm.

171
 User's Manual

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Video Loss.

Figure 5-126 Video loss

Step 2 Configure the settings for the video loss detection parameters. For details, see "5.10.4.1
Configuring Motion Detection Settings".

For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate
PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.

● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want
to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

5.10.4.3 Configuring Tampering Settings

When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of the causes
such as sunlight status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you
can configure the tampering alarm settings.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Video Tampering.

172
 User's Manual
Figure 5-127 Video tampering

Step 2 Configure the settings for the tampering detection parameters. For details, see "5.10.4.1
Configuring Motion Detection Settings".

For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate
PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

● Click Default to restore the default setting.

● Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want
to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

5.10.5 System Events

You can configure the alarm output for three types of system event (HDD, Network, and User). When
there is an abnormal system event occurs, the system activates alarms in the way that you configure
in this section.

5.10.5.1 Configuring HDD Event Settings

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Exception > Disk.

173
 User's Manual
Figure 5-128 Disk

Step 2 Configure the settings for the HDD event.

Table 5-41 HDD event settings

Parameter Description
In the Event Type list, select No Disk, Disk Error, or Low Space as the
Event Type
event type.
Enable Enable or disable the HDD event detection function.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
Alarm-out Port ● Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected
alarm box.
● Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by
USB gateway or camera gateway.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the
Post-Alarm external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300
seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up message in your
Show Message
local host PC.
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to upload the
Report Alarm alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event
occurs.

174
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an email
notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
Menu > NETWORK > Email.

Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.

Log Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Select to enable audio broadcast/alarm tone in response to an HDD alarm
Alarm Tone
event.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.10.5.2 Configuring Network Event Settings

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Exception > Network.

Figure 5-129 Network

Step 2 Configure the settings for the Network event.

Table 5-42 Network event settings

Parameter Description
In the Event Type list, select Offline, IP Conflict, or MAC Conflict as the
Event Type
event type.
Enable Enable or disable the Network event detection function.

175
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
Alarm-out Port ● External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected
alarm box.
● Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected
by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the
Post-Alarm external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300
seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up message in your
Show Message
local host PC.
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an email
notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
Menu > NETWORK > Email.

Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.

Log Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Continue to record for some time after the alarm is ended. The value
Post Record
ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Select to enable audio broadcast/alarm tones in response to a network
Alarm Tone
alarm event.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.10.6 Configuring Disarming

You can disarm all alarm linkage actions as needed.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Disarming.
Step 2 Click to enable disarming.

176
 User's Manual
Figure 5-130 Disarming

Step 3 (Optional) Select Off to disable event notifications.

With Disarming enabled, if you disable event notifications, event notifications will not be
pushed to the clients including the mobile app, platform and cloud platform.
Step 4 Select alarm linkage actions to disarm.

All alarm linkage actions will be disarmed when you select All.
Step 5 Click Apply.

5.11 AI Function

5.11.1 Configuring AI Mode

To use AI functions, you need to enable the corresponding AI mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > AI Mode.

177
 User's Manual
Figure 5-131 AI mode

Step 2 Select an AI mode

● When SMD is selected, only SMD is available.
● When Face is selected, only face detection and face recognition are available.
● When IVS&SMD is selected, only IVS and SMD are available.

SMD, face detection, face recognition and IVS cannot be enabled simultaneously.

5.11.2 For Pro AI Series

The faces are fuzzily processed to comply with relevant regulations.

AI module provides face detection, face recognition, IVS functions, and video structuring. These
functions take effect after they are configured and enabled. It adopts deep learning and can realize
precision alarms.
● Face detection: The Device can analyze the faces captured by the camera and link the configured
alarms.
● Face recognition: The Device can compare the captured faces with the face database and then
link the configured alarms.
● IVS: The IVS function processes and analyzes the human and vehicle images to extract the key
information to match with the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules,
the system activates alarms. The IVS function can avoid wrong alarms by filtering the factors such
as rains, light, and animals.
● Video structuring: The device can detect and extract key features from the human bodies and
non-motor vehicles in the video, and then build a structured database. You can search any target
you need with these features. For example, you can search any people who wears yellow short
sleeve shirt.

5.11.2.1 Face Detection

The Device can analyze the pictures captured by the camera to detect whether the faces are on the
pictures. You can search and filter the recorded videos the faces and play back.

If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, and video
structuring, you can use one of them at the same time for the same channel.

178
 User's Manual

5.11.2.1.1 Configuring Face Detection Parameters

The alarms are generated according to the configured parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Face Detection.

Figure 5-132 Face detection

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure face detection function,
and then enable it.
Step 3 Select AI by Camera or AI by Device as the AI type,.
● AI by Camera: This option requires certain AI cameras. The camera will do all the AI
analysis, and then give the results to the DVR.
● AI by Device: The camera only transmits normal video stream to the DVR, and then the
DVR will do all the AI analysis.
Step 4 Click Setting next to Rule draw areas to filter the target.
You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and minimum size). When the
target is smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be
activated. The maximum size should be larger than the minimum size.
Step 5 Configure the schedule and linkage parameters.

Table 5-43 Schedule and linkage parameters

Parameter Description
Schedule Define a period during which the detection is active.

179
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● General Alarm: Enable general alarm and select the alarm output
port.
● External Alarm: Connect the alarm box to the Device and then
Alarm-out Port enable it.
● Wireless Siren: Connect the wireless gateway to the Device and
then enable it.
When an alarm event occurs, the system links the peripheral alarm
devices connected to the selected output port.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the
Post-Alarm external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300
seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up alarm
Show Message
message in your local host PC.
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to upload the
alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm
event occurs.
Report Alarm
● This function is available on select models.
● The corresponding parameters in the alarm center should be
configured.
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an email
notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
Menu > NETWORK > Email.

Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s)
starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
Record Channel
The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function must
be enabled.

Click Setting to display the PTZ page.

PTZ Linkage
To use this function, the PTZ operations must be configured.

Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after
Post Record the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300
seconds.
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected channels.

Tour ● To use this function, the tour setting must be configured.

● After the tour is ended, the live view screen returns to the view
layout before tour started.

180
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the Picture Storage checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
Picture Storage
To use this function, make sure the snapshot function is enabled for
Intel in Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Snapshot.

Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event

occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in Main
Menu > DISPLAY > TOUR > Extra Screen.
Video Matrix

● This function is available on select models.

● The extra screen must be enabled to support this function.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Alarm Tone Select to enable audio broadcast in response to a face detection event.
Warning Light Select the checkbox to enable the warning light alarm of the camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable the sound alarm of the camera.
Smart Illumination Select the checkbox to enable the smart illumination of the camera.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.11.2.1.2 Searching for and Playing Detected Faces

You can search the detected faces and play back.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Detection.

Figure 5-133 Face detection

Step 2 Select the channel, enter the start time and end time, and set for the gender, age, glasses,

181
 User's Manual
beard, and mask.
Step 3 Click Smart Search.
The results are displayed.

Figure 5-134 Search results

Step 4 Select the face that you want to play back.

182
 User's Manual
Figure 5-135 Registered information

Step 5 Click to start playing back the recorded detected face snapshots.

Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail
playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To export the database file (.csv) to the external storage device, select files, click Export,
and then select the save path.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup,
select the save path and file type, and then click Start.

183
 User's Manual
Figure 5-136 Backup

● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.

5.11.2.2 Face Recognition

Face recognition applies to AI preview mode and smart search.
● AI preview mode: Supports comparing the detected faces with the face database, and display the
comparison results.
● Smart search: Supports faces searching by faces attributes or portraits.

● If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, and video
structuring, you can use one of them at the same time for the same channel.
● Before enabling face recognition function for a channel, the face detection must be enabled first
for this channel.

5.11.2.2.1 Creating a Face Database

You should create a face database for comparing the detected faces and the faces in the database.
The Device supports creating maximum 20 databases and registering 100,000 faces.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Config.

184
 User's Manual
Figure 5-137 Face database configuration

Step 2 At Type, you can select Local or Remote.

● Local: Viewing the existing face databases or adding new one on the DVR.
● Remote: If you have face recognition camera, you can select this to view the existing
face databases or adding new one on the camera.
Step 3 Click Add.

Figure 5-138 Add face database

185
 User's Manual
Step 4 Enter the face database name, and then click OK.
● Click to modify database name.
● Click to view the database details and add new faces to the database.
● Select the database, and then click Modeling. The system will extract the attributes of
face pictures in the database for the future comparison.
● Select the database, and then click Delete to delete the database.

Figure 5-139 Configure database

5.11.2.2.2 Adding Face Pictures

You can add face pictures to the existing databases one by one or by batch, or add from the
detected faces.

To add face pictures one by one or by batch, you need to get the pictures from the USB storage
device. The picture size should be smaller than 256K with resolution between 200 × 200–6000 ×
5000.

Adding One Face Picture

1. Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Config.

186
 User's Manual

2. Click of the database that you want to configure.

Figure 5-140 Details

3. Click Register ID.

187
 User's Manual
Figure 5-141 Register ID

4. Click to add a face picture.

Figure 5-142 Browse

5. Select a face picture and enter the registration information.

188
 User's Manual
Figure 5-143 Register ID

6. Click OK.
The system prompts the registration is successful.
7. On the Details page, click Search.
The system prompts modeling is successful.

If the system prompts the message indicating modeling is in process, wait a while and then click
Search again. If modeling is failed, the registered face picture cannot be used for face
recognition.

189
 User's Manual
Figure 5-144 Details

Adding Face Pictures in Batches

1. Give a name to the face picture.

Table 5-44 Register ID

Naming format Description
Name Enter the name.
Gender Enter 1 or 2. 1 represents male, and 2 represents female.
Birthday Enter numbers in the format of yyyy-mm-dd.
Country Enter the abbreviation of country. For example, CN for China.
ID Type 1 represents ID card; 2 represents passport; 3 represents officer password.
ID No. Enter the ID number.
Address Enter the address.
2. On the Details page, click Batch register.

190
 User's Manual
Figure 5-145 Batch register

3. Click Select file, max select 500 each time or Select a folder to import face pictures.
4. Click OK to complete batch registration.

Adding the Detected Faces

1. Right-click on the live view screen, and then select Live Mode > AI Mode.

Figure 5-146 AI mode live view

2. Double-click the detected face snapshot that you want to add.

191
 User's Manual
Figure 5-147 Playback

3. Click Add to Human Face Database.

Figure 5-148 Register ID

4. Select the face database and enter the ID information.

5. Click OK to complete registration.

192
 User's Manual

5.11.2.2.3 Face Recognition Configuration

You can compare the detected faces with the faces in the database to judge if the detected face
belongs to the database. The comparison result will be displayed on the AI mode live view screen
and smart search page, and link the alarms.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Face Recognition.

Figure 5-149 Face recognition

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure face recognition function,
and then enable it.
Step 3 Set the Schedule. For details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
Step 4 Set Target Face Database.
1) Click Setting.

193
 User's Manual
Figure 5-150 Face database

2) Select one or multiple face databases.

3) Click OK.
The selected face database is listed.

Figure 5-151 Selected face database

Step 5 Configure the added face database.

● Click to modify the similarity. The lower the number is, the easier the alarm linkage
will trigger.
● Click to delete the face database.
● Click to set the alarm linkage.
● After setting is completed, click OK.
Step 6 (Optional) (Optional) Enable the Stranger Mode.

194
 User's Manual

1) Enable the Stranger mode ( ). When the detected faces do not belong to the face
database, the system remarks the face as "Stranger".
2) Click Setting to set the alarm linkage.
3) After setting is completed, click OK.
Step 7 Click Apply to complete the settings.
After the face recognition function is enabled, right-click on the live view screen, and then
select Live Mode > AI Mode.
● If the detected face belongs to the enabled face database, the similarity result is
displayed.
● If the detected face does not belong to the enabled face database, the face will be
remarked as "Stranger".

Figure 5-152 Similarity result

5.11.2.2.4 Smart Search for Face Recognition

You can compare the detected faces with the face database and play back.
● Search by attributes: Search the face database by the face attributes.
● Search by picture: Search the face database by uploading face pictures.

Searching by Attributes
1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Recognition > Search by Attributes.

195
 User's Manual
Figure 5-153 Search by attributes

2. Select the channel and set the parameters such as start time, end time, gender, age, glasses,
beard, mask, and similarity according to your requirement.
3. Click Smart Search.

196
 User's Manual
Figure 5-154 Smart search

4. Click the picture that you want to play back.

197
 User's Manual
Figure 5-155 Registered information

5. Click to play back the recorded video.

Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To export the database file (.csv) to the external storage device, select files, click Export, and
then select the save path.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select
the save path and file type, and then click Start.

198
 User's Manual
Figure 5-156 Backup

● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.

Search by Picture
1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Recognition > Search by Picture.

Figure 5-157 Search by picture

2. Upload face pictures from Face Database or Local Upload.

199
 User's Manual

Maximum 30 pictures can be uploaded at one time, and the system support searching 8 pictures
at one time.
● Face Database
a. Click Face Database.

Figure 5-158 Face database

b. Set the searching parameters by selecting the face database and gender, and entering
name and ID No. according to your actual requirement.
c. Click Search to display the results that satisfy the requirement.

Click Reset to clear the searching parameters.

d. Select the picture and then click OK.

200
 User's Manual
Figure 5-159 Uploaded picture

● Local Upload
Plug the USB storage device (with face pictures) to the Device, and then click Local Upload.
Then select the picture from the USB storage device, and then click OK. The selected face
pictures are uploaded.
3. After the face pictures are uploaded, continue to configure other parameters (channel, start time,
end time, and similarity).
4. Click Smart Search.
The searching results are displayed.

201
 User's Manual
Figure 5-160 Search results

202
 User's Manual
5. Select the face picture that you want to play back.Figure 5-161 Playback

6. Click to play back the recorded video.

Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.
● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select
the save path and file type, and then click Start.

Figure 5-162 Backup

203
 User's Manual

5.11.2.3 IVS Function

The IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with the
preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.

If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, and video
structuring, you can use one of them at the same time for the same channel.

5.11.2.3.1 Configuring IVS Parameters

The alarms are generated according to the configured parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS.

Figure 5-163 IVS

Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel number that you want to configure the IVS function.
Step 3 At Type, you can select from AI by Camera and AI by Device.
● AI by Camera: This option requires certain AI cameras. The camera will do all the AI
analysis, and then give the results to the DVR.
● AI by Device: The camera only transmits normal video stream to the DVR, and then the
DVR will do all the AI analysis.
Step 4 Click Add.

204
 User's Manual
Figure 5-164 Added rule

Step 5 Configure the parameters for the rule that you selected. For details on the configuration of
the tripwire or intrusion rule, see "5.11.2.3.2 Configuring Tripwire Rules" and "5.11.2.3.3
Configuring Intrusion Rules".
Step 6 Select the checkbox of the rule to enable it.
Step 7 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.11.2.3.2 Configuring Tripwire Rules

When the target object crosses the tripwire in the defined direction, the system activates alarms.
● The tripwire can be configured as a straight line or broken line.
● Supports detecting one-way or two-way tripwire crossing.
● Supports multiple tripwires in the same scenario to meet the complexity.
● Supports size filtering for target.

Procedure
Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Tripwire.

205
 User's Manual
Figure 5-165 Tripwire

Step 2 Draw a tripwire.

1) In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.
2) Click .
The monitoring screen to configure the tripwire rules is displayed.

Figure 5-166 Tripwire rule

3) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.
The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the
maximum size and the minimum size.

206
 User's Manual
4) Configure the parameters.

Table 5-45 Tripwire parameters

Parameter Description
Name Enter the customized rule name.
Set the direction of the tripwire. You can choose A to B (left to right), B to
Direction
A (right to left), and Both.
Configure the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity The higher the value, the easier to trigger an alarm but meanwhile the
higher false alarm rate.
Target Filter Click and then select effective target. With Human and Motor
Vehicle selected by default, the system automatically identifies the
Effective Target
person and motor vehicle appeared within the monitoring range.
5) Drag to draw a tripwire. The tripwire can be a straight line, broken line or polygon.
6) Click OK to save the settings.
Step 3 Click to set the actions to be triggered.

Figure 5-167 Trigger

Step 4 Configure the triggering parameters.

Table 5-46 Schedule and linkage parameters

Parameter Description
Schedule Define a period during which the detection is active.

207
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● General Alarm: Enable general alarm and select the alarm
output port.
● External Alarm: Connect the alarm box to the Device and
Alarm-out Port then enable it.
● Wireless Siren: Connect the wireless gateway to the Device
and then enable it.
When an alarm event occurs, the system links the peripheral
alarm devices connected to the selected output port.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after
Post-Alarm the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up alarm
Show Message
message in your local host PC.
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to
upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center)
when an alarm event occurs.
Report Alarm
● This function is available on select models.
● The corresponding parameters in the alarm center should be
configured.
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.

Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected

channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
Record Channel
The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function
must be enabled.

Click Setting to display the PTZ page.

PTZ Linkage
To use this function, the PTZ operations must be configured.

Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording
Post Record after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds.

208
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.

Tour
● To use this function, the tour setting must be configured.
● After the tour is ended, the live view screen returns to the
view layout before tour started.
Select the Picture Storage checkbox to take a snapshot of the
selected channel.
Picture Storage
To use this function, make sure the snapshot function is enabled
for Intel in Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Snapshot.

Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event

occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in
Main Menu > DISPLAY > TOUR > Extra Screen.
Video Matrix

● This function is available on select models.

● The extra screen must be enabled to support this function.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm
Log
log.
Select to enable audio broadcast in response to a face detection
Alarm Tone
event.
Select the checkbox to enable the warning light alarm of the
Warning Light
camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable the sound alarm of the camera.
Select the checkbox to enable the smart illumination of the
Smart Illumination
camera.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 Select the Enable checkbox, and then click Apply.
The tripwire detecting function is active. When the target object crosses the tripwire in the
defined direction, the system activates alarms.

5.11.2.3.3 Configuring Intrusion Rules

When the target enters and leaves the defined detection area, or the target appears in the defined
area, the system activates alarms.
● You can define the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.
● Supports detecting the behaviors that enter and leave the intrusion areas.
● Supports detecting the behaviors that are moving in the intrusion areas. The quantity of areas
and lasting time can be configured.
● Supports size filtering for target.

Procedure

209
 User's Manual
Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Intrusion.

Figure 5-168 Intrusion

Step 2 Draw an area.

1) In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.
2) Click .

Figure 5-169 Intrusion rule

3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules.

210
 User's Manual
Table 5-47 Intrusion parameters
Parameter Description
Name Enter the customized rule name.
Configure the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity The higher the value, the easier to trigger an alarm but
meanwhile the higher false alarm rate.
Action Set the intrusion action, including appear and crossing area.
Set the intrusion direction. You can select Enter, Exit, and
Direction
Both.
Target Filter Click and then select effective target. With Human
and Motor Vehicle selected by default, the system
Effective Target automatically identifies the person and motor vehicle
appeared within the monitoring range.
4) Drag to draw an area.
5) Click OK to save the settings.
Step 3 Click to set the actions to be triggered.
Step 4 Select the Enable checkbox, and then click Apply.
The intrusion detecting function is active. When the target enters and leaves the area, or
the target appears in the defined area, the system activates alarms.

5.11.2.3.4 Smart Search for IVS Function

You can search for the intelligent events and play back.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > IVS.

Figure 5-170 IVS

Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to search for the events, and then set
other parameters such as start time, end time, event type, and alarm object.
Step 3 Click Smart Search.
The results that satisfy the searching conditions are displayed.

211
 User's Manual
Figure 5-171 Search results

Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.

Figure 5-172 Playback

Step 5 Click to play back the recorded video.

Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail
playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup,

212
 User's Manual
select the save path and file type, and then click Start.

Figure 5-173 Backup

● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.

5.11.2.4 Video Structuring

The device can detect and extract key features from the human bodies and non-motor vehicles in
the video, and then build a structured database. You can search any target you need with these
features.

5.11.2.4.1 Configuring Video Structuring

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Video Structuring.

Figure 5-174 Video structuring

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure video structuring function,
and then enable it.
Step 3 At Type, you can select from AI by Camera and AI by Device.
● AI by Camera: This option requires certain AI cameras. The camera will do all the AI
analysis, and then give the results to the DVR.
● AI by Device: The camera only transmits normal video stream to the DVR, and then the

213
 User's Manual
DVR will do all the AI analysis.
Step 4 You can select from Human Detection, Face Detect, and Non-motor Vehicle.
● Human Detection: Select this option, and then the device will analyze all the human
body features in the video, including Top, Top Color, Bottom, Bottom Color, Hat, Bag,
Gender, Age, and Umbrella. You can search the target you need with these features.
● Face Detect: You need to select Human Detection first, and then you can select this
option. If you select this option, and there is any human face appears in the video, then
there will be an extra face image and some extra face features in the human body
detection results, including Glasses, Expression, Mask, and Beard. You can search the
target you need with these features.
● Non-motor Vehicle: Select this option, and then the device will analyze all the non-
motor vehicle features in the video, including Type, Vehicle Color, People Number, and
Helmet. You can search the target you need with these features.
Step 5 Click Apply.

5.11.2.4.2 Smart Search for Video Structuring

You can search the target you need with human body features or non-motor vehicle features

Human Body Detection

1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Human Body Detection.

Figure 5-175 Human body detection

2. Select the channel and the time, and then select one or multiple features.
3. Click Smart Search.
● If you only selected Human Detection and did not select Face Detect in Main Menu > AI >
Parameters > Video Structuring, there will be only human body features displayed in the
results.

214
 User's Manual
● If you selected Human Detection and Face Detect in Main Menu > AI > Parameters >
Video Structuring, and there is any human face appears in the video, there will be extra face
features displayed in the results.
4. Select one or multiple results, and then you can
● Click Export to export them to the USB device
● Click Backup to make backup in the DVR
● Click Lock so that they don't get overwritten or deleted
● Click Add Tag to name them as needed.

Non-motor Vehicle Detection

1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Non-motor Vehicle Detection.

Figure 5-176 Non-motor vehicle detection

2. Select the channel and the time, and then select one or multiple features.
3. Click Smart Search.

215
 User's Manual
Figure 5-177 Search results

4. Select one or multiple results, and then you can

● Click Export to export them to the USB device
● Click Backup to make backup in the DVR
● Click Lock so that they don't get overwritten or deleted
● Click Add Tag to name them as needed.

5.11.3 For Lite AI Series

AI module provides SMD (Smart Motion Detection) and IVS functions. These functions take effect
after they are configured and enabled. It adopts deep learning and can realize precision alarms. You
can only enable one of them to the same channel at the same time.
● SMD: The device can detect and classify humans and vehicles in the image.
● IVS: The IVS function processes and analyzes the human and vehicle images to extract the key
information to match with the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules,
the system activates alarms. The IVS function can avoid wrong alarms by filtering the factors such
as rains, light, and animals.
● Face detection: The Device can analyze the faces captured by the camera and link the configured
alarms. This function is available for XVR5X-I and XVR7X-I series only.
● Face recognition: The Device can compare the captured faces with the face database and then
link the configured alarms. This function is available for XVR7X-I series only.

216
 User's Manual

SMD, face detection, face recognition and IVS cannot be enabled simultaneously on select models.

5.11.3.1 SMD
The device can detect and classify humans and vehicles in the image.

5.11.3.1.1 Configuring SMD Parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > SMD.

Figure 5-178 SMD

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure face detection function,
and then enable it.
Step 3 Set the sensitivity for smart motion detection, and then select human or motor vehicle or
both as the effective target.
Step 4 Configure the anti-dither time.
The anti-dither time is the period from the end of motion detection to the end of alarm
linkage action.
Step 5 Configure other parameters.

Table 5-48 Schedule and linkage parameters

Parameter Description
Schedule Define a period during which the detection is active.

217
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● General Alarm: Enable general alarm and select the alarm
output port.
● External Alarm: Connect the alarm box to the Device and
Alarm-out Port then enable it.
● Wireless Siren: Connect the wireless gateway to the Device
and then enable it.
When an alarm event occurs, the system links the peripheral
alarm devices connected to the selected output port.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after
Post-Alarm the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up alarm
Show Message
message in your local host PC.
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to
upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center)
when an alarm event occurs.
Report Alarm
● This function is available on select models.
● The corresponding parameters in the alarm center should be
configured.
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.

Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected

channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
Record Channel
The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function
must be enabled.

Click Setting to display the PTZ page.

PTZ Linkage
To use this function, the PTZ operations must be configured.

Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording
Post Record after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds.

218
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.

Tour
● To use this function, the tour setting must be configured.
● After the tour is ended, the live view screen returns to the
view layout before tour started.
Select the Picture Storage checkbox to take a snapshot of the
selected channel.
Picture Storage
To use this function, make sure the snapshot function is enabled
for Intel in Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Snapshot.

Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event

occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in
Main Menu > DISPLAY > TOUR > Extra Screen.
Video Matrix

● This function is available on select models.

● The extra screen must be enabled to support this function.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm
Log
log.
Select to enable audio broadcast in response to a face detection
Alarm Tone
event.
Select the checkbox to enable the warning light alarm of the
Warning Light
camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable the sound alarm of the camera.
Select the checkbox to enable the smart illumination of the
Smart Illumination
camera.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.11.3.1.2 Searching for SMD Reports

You can search the detection history by channel, object type, and time.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > SMD.

Figure 5-179 SMD

Step 2 Select the channel, enter the start time and end time, and select the object type you need.
Step 3 Click Search.

219
 User's Manual
The results are displayed.

5.11.3.2 Configuring IVS Function

The IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with the
preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.

5.11.3.2.1 Configuring IVS Parameters

The alarms are generated according to the configured parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS.

Figure 5-180 IVS

You can enable the AI Mode, and then the detection accuracy would be improved, but the
video stream quantity that the DVR can process will reduce.
Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel number that you want to configure the IVS function.
Step 3 Click Add.
Step 4 Configure the parameters for the rule that you selected. For details on the configuration of
the tripwire or intrusion rule, see "5.11.2.3.2 Configuring Tripwire Rules" and "5.11.2.3.3
Configuring Intrusion Rules".
Step 5 Select the checkbox of the rule to enable it.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.

220
 User's Manual

5.11.3.2.2 Smart Search for IVS Function

Background Information
You can search for the intelligent events and play back.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > IVS.

Figure 5-181 IVS

Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to search for the events, and then set
other parameters such as start time, end time, event type, and alarm object.
Step 3 Click Smart Search.
The results that satisfy the searching conditions are displayed.

Figure 5-182 Search results

Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.

221
 User's Manual
Figure 5-183 Playback

Step 5 Click to play back the recorded video.

Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail
playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.
● To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup,
select the save path and file type, and then click Start.

Figure 5-184 Backup

● To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click
Lock.
● To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Tag.

222
 User's Manual

5.11.3.3 Face Detection (For XVR5X-I and XVR7X-I series only)

Some series of devices can analyze the pictures captured by the camera to detect whether the faces
are on the pictures. You can search and filter the recorded videos the faces and play back. For details,
see "5.11.2.1 Face Detection".

If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, you can use one
of them at the same time for the same channel.

5.11.3.4 Face Recognition (For XVR7X-I series only)

Face recognition applies to AI preview mode and smart search. For details, see "5.11.2.2 Face
Recognition".

5.11.4 Configuring IVS Mode

For some models, you can switch the IVS function between general mode and advanced mode in
Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS. The advanced mode features higher detection accuracy than
the general mode but supports fewer channels for IVS. The function might vary depending on the
model.

223
 User's Manual
Figure 5-185 IVS mode

5.11.5 Configuring Smart Schedule

There are two modes for a channel to activate AI functions.
● General mode: Only one AI function can be enabled for the designated channel during different
periods on each day in the week.
● Schedule mode: The system can activate different AI functions for the designated channel during
different periods on each day in the week.
● This section introduces how to enable the schedule mode.

224
 User's Manual
Figure 5-186 Schedule mode

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Intelligent Mode.
Step 2 Select Schedule Mode.

The configurations of AI functions in the general mode and schedule mode are
independent. The changes you make in one mode does not affect the configurations in the
other mode.
Step 3 Select one channel and then click .
Step 4 Define the periods for AI functions.
● Define the period by drawing.
1. Select the checkbox of AI function.

Figure 5-187 AI function

2. On the timeline, drag to define a period.

You can set up to 6 periods for each day in the week. For each period, you can

225
 User's Manual
enable an AI function.
● Define the period by editing.
1. Click .

Figure 5-188 Period

2. Configure the time range for each period and then select the AI function to be
effective during each period.

You can select All to apply the settings to all the days in the week, or select specific
days that you want to apply the settings to.
3. Click OK.
Step 5 Click Apply.

5.12 IoT Function

5.12.1 Configuring Sensor Settings

You can connect external sensors wirelessly through the Device with USB gateway or through
connecting to a camera gateway. After connection, you can activate alarm events through external
sensors.

5.12.1.1 Connecting Sensor through Device

Only the Device with USB gateway supports this function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Sensor Pairing.

226
 User's Manual
Figure 5-189 Sensor pairing

Step 2 In the Access Type list, select USB Gateway.

Step 3 Click Add.

Figure 5-190 Add USB gateway

Step 4 Click Pair.

227
 User's Manual
Figure 5-191 Pair

Step 5 Click Back to exit the pairing page.

Click to modify the sensor name; click to delete sensor information.

Figure 5-192 Sensor pairing

5.12.1.2 Connecting Sensor through Camera with Gateway

Only the camera with USB gateway supports this function.

228
 User's Manual

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Sensor Pairing.

Figure 5-193 Sensor pairing

Step 2 In the Access Type list, select Camera Gateway.

Step 3 In the Channel list, select the channel that is connected to the camera.
Step 4 Click Add.

Figure 5-194 Add camera gateway

Step 5 Click Pair.

The Device starts pairing with the sensor.

229
 User's Manual
Figure 5-195 Pair

Step 6 Click Back to exit the pairing page.

Click to modify the sensor name; click to delete sensor information.

230
 User's Manual
Figure 5-196 Sensor pairing

5.12.1.3 Configuring Alarm Linkage

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Wireless Detector.

231
 User's Manual
Figure 5-197 Wireless detector

Step 2 In the Access Type list, select USB Gateway, Camera Gateway, or All.

When Access Type is Camera Gateway, you can select Channel to filter the status of
present wireless detector.
Step 3 Click .

Figure 5-198 Setting

Step 4 Configure the settings for alarm linkage.

Table 5-49 Alarm linkage settings

Parameter Description
Name Enter the customized alarm name.

232
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
Schedule Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
PTZ Linkage Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm
devices connected to the selected output port.
Alarm-out Port ● Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
● Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after
Post-Alarm the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording
Post Record after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Configure the time period from end of event detection to the
Anti-Dither
stop of alarm.
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.

Record Channel
The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must
be enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".

Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected

channel.
Snapshot
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.

Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected

Tour
channels.
Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a
Alarm Tone
local alarm event.

233
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
● Show Message: Select the Show Message checkbox to
enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
● Buzzer: Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the
Device.
● Video Matrix: Select the checkbox to enable the function.
When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs
the settings configured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.

This function is available on select models.

● Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification
when an alarm event occurs.
More Setting

To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled

in Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
● Log: Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a
local alarm log.
● Extra screen: Select the checkbox to enable the function.
When an alarm event occurs, the extra screen outputs the
settings configured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour > Sub
Screen.

● This function is available on select models.

● To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 On the Wireless Detector page, click Apply to complete the settings.

5.12.2 Configuring Temperature and Humidity Camera

You can view, search and export the temperature and humidity data of camera with such sensors
and configure the alarm event settings.
To use this function, please make sure there is at least one camera with temperature and humidity
sensor has been connected to the Device.

5.12.2.1 Enabling Detecting Function

You should enable the IoT function the first time when you enter this page.

Procedure
Step 1 On the main menu, select IoT > Management > Temperature/Humidity.

234
 User's Manual
Figure 5-199 Temperature/Humidity

Step 2 Select the Enable checkbox to enable IoT function.

Figure 5-200 Enable

The Device starts detecting the temperature and humidity data from the camera and
display on the Realtime Display page.
Step 3 (Optional) Set temperature displaying mode.
When Show°F (Fahrenheit Degree) is selected, the temperature will be displayed by
Fahrenheit degree in Realtime Display tab.

5.12.2.2 Viewing Temperature and Humidity Data

You can view the temperature and humidity data on the Realtime Display page after the IoT
function is enabled.
In the Refresh Interval box, select data refresh interval. For example, you can select 5 Sec.
You can also display the temperature and humidity data in graphical way by selecting the Display
Chart checkbox.

235
 User's Manual
Figure 5-201 Chart

Click Remove to delete the data.

5.12.2.3 Exporting Temperature and Humidity Data

You can export the temperature and humidity data in .bmp format. This section uses exporting
humidity data as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.
Step 2 On the Realtime Display page, click the Humidity tab.

236
 User's Manual
Figure 5-202 Humidity

Step 3 Click Lock to lock the data.

The export button is enabled.
Step 4 Click Export. The system starts exporting the data.
Step 5 Click OK.
You can find the exported data on your USB device.

5.12.2.4 Configuring Alarm Linkage

You can configure alarm linkage settings for temperature and humidity data.

5.12.2.4.1 Configuring Alarm Linkage for Temperature Data

Procedure
Step 1 On the home page, select IoT > Management > Temperature/Humidity.

237
 User's Manual
Figure 5-203 Temperature/Humidity

Step 2 On the temperature information line, click .

Figure 5-204 Setting

Step 3 Configure the settings for alarm linkage.

Table 5-50 Alarm linkage settings

Parameter Description
Access Point Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Type Temperature by default.
Detect Position Name Set the detect position name.
Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the
channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of
Preview Channel
access point or any other channels according to your actual
situation.
Event Type Select event type as High or Low, and set the upper and low

238
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
temperature limit respectively. For example, select event type as
Upper Limit High and set upper limit as 28, the alarm occurs when the
temperature reaches 28 °C.
Enable Enable the alarm function.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
Schedule Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
PTZ Linkage Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm
devices connected to the selected output port.
Alarm-out Port ● Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
● Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after
Post-Alarm the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording
Post Record after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Configure the time period from end of event detection to the stop
Anti-Dither
of alarm.
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.

Record Channel
The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be
enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".

Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected

channel.
Snapshot
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.

Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected

Tour
channels.
Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a
Alarm Tone
local alarm event.

239
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
● Show Message: Select the Show Message checkbox to enable
a pop-up message in your local host PC.
● Buzzer: Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the
Device.
● Video Matrix: Select the checkbox to enable the function.
When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs
the settings configured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.

This function is available on select models.

● Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification
when an alarm event occurs.
More Setting

To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled

in Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
● Log: Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local
alarm log.
● Extra screen: Select the checkbox to enable the function.
When an alarm event occurs, the extra screen outputs the
settings configured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour > Sub
Screen.

● This function is available on select models.

● To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.
Step 4 Click Save to save the settings.

5.12.2.4.2 Configuring Alarm Settings for Humidity Data

You can configure the alarm event by setting the humidity data.

Procedure
Step 1 On the home page, select IoT > Management > Temperature/Humidity.

240
 User's Manual
Figure 5-205 Temperature/Humidity

Step 2 On the humidity information line, click .

Figure 5-206 Setting

Step 3 Configure the settings for the following parameters.

Table 5-51 Alarm settings

Parameter Description
Access Point Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Type Humidity by default.
Detect Position Name Set the detect position name.
Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the
channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of
Preview Channel
access point or any other channels according to your actual
situation.
Event Type Select event type as High Humidity or Low Humidity, and set

241
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
the upper and low humidity limit respectively. For example,
Upper Limit select event type as High Humidity and set upper limit as 60,
the alarm occurs when the humidity reaches 60%RH.
Enable Enable the alarm function.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
Schedule Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
PTZ Linkage Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Click Setting to configure the parameters.
● Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm
devices connected to the selected output port.
Alarm-out Port ● Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
● Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm
Post-Alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0
seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording
Post Record after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Configure the time period from end of event detection to the
Anti-Dither
stop of alarm.
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.

Record Channel
The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must
be enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".

Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the

selected channel.
Snapshot
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.

Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected

Tour
channels.
Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a
Alarm Tone
local alarm event.

242
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
● Show Message: Select the Show Message checkbox to
enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
● Buzzer: Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the
Device.
● Video Matrix: Select the checkbox to enable the function.
When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs
the settings configured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.

More Setting
This function is available on select models.
● Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification
when an alarm event occurs.

To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled

in Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
● Log: Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a
local alarm log.
Step 4 Click Save to save the settings.

5.12.2.5 Searching IoT Information

You can search and backup all your IoT data. To back up the data, you should prepare a USB device
and plug it into the Device.

Procedure
Step 1 On the home page, select IoT > IOT Search.

Figure 5-207 IoT search

243
 User's Manual
Step 2 Configure the parameters settings.

Table 5-52 IoT search parameters

Parameter Description
Access Point Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Display Type In the Display Type list, select List or Diagram.
Select the information type that you want to search. You can select
Type
Humidity or Temperature.
Select the information state that you want to search.
Status
This option is available when you select List in the Display Type list.
Start Time Enter the start time and end time for the information that you want to
End Time search.
Step 3 Click Search.
The system starts search according to your parameters settings. After searching is finished,
the result displays.

Click Goto to switch result pages.

Figure 5-208 List

244
 User's Manual
Figure 5-209 Diagram

Step 4 Click Export. The system starts exporting the data.

Step 5 Click OK.
You can find the exported data on your USB device.

5.12.3 Configuring Wireless Siren

You can connect the wireless siren to the Device, when there is an alarm event activated on the
Device, the wireless siren generates alarms.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Wireless Siren.

Figure 5-210 Wireless siren

245
 User's Manual
Step 2 Configure the settings for the wireless alarm output.

Table 5-53 Wireless alarm output parameters

Parameter Description
● Auto: Automatically activate alarm if the alarm output
USB Gateway, Camera function for wireless siren is enabled for specific events.
Gateway ● Manual: Activate alarm immediately.
● Off: Do not activate alarm.
Alarm Release Click OK to clear all alarm output status of wireless siren.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

5.13 POS
You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information from it.
This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After connection is
established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid text in the channel
window.

Playing POS information in the local playback and viewing the POS information in the live view
screen only support single-channel mode and four-channel mode. Displaying monitoring screen and
playing back in the web support multi-channel mode.

5.13.1 Searching the Transaction Records

The system supports fuzzy search.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu>POS > POS Search.

246
 User's Manual
Figure 5-211 POS search

Step 2 In the POS Search box, enter the information such as transaction number on your receipt,
amount, or product name.
Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period that you want to search
the POS transaction information.
Step 4 Click Search.
The searched transaction results display in the table.

5.13.2 Configuring POS Settings

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > POS > POS Setting.

247
 User's Manual
Figure 5-212 POS setting

Step 2 Configure the settings for the POS parameters.

Table 5-54 POS parameters

Parameter Description
In the POS Name list, select the POS machine that you want to
configure settings for. Click to modify the POS name.
POS Name
The POS name supports 21 Chinese characters or 63 English
characters.

Enable Enable the POS function.

Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.
Record Channel The recording for POS alarms and auto recording function must
be enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".
Privacy Enter the privacy content.
Select POS by default. Different machine corresponds to
Protocol
different protocol.
In the Connect Type list, select the connection protocol type.
Click , the IP Address page is displayed.
Connection Mode
In the Source IP box, enter the IP address (the machine that is
connected to the Device) that sends messages.
Character Encode Select a character encoding mode.

248
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
In the Overlay Mode list, Select Page or ROLL.
● Page means to turn a page when there are 16 lines of
overlay information.
● ROLL means to roll up the page when there are 16 lines of
Overlay Mode
overlay information. The first line disappears each time.

When local preview mode is 4-split, overlay information is

substituted when there are 8 lines.
When the network is not working correctly and cannot be
recovered after the entered timeout limit, the POS information
Network Timeout
will not display normally. After the network is recovered, the
latest POS information will be displayed.
Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS
Overlay Time information displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS
information disappear from the screen after 5 seconds.
In the Font Size list, select Small, Medium, or Large as the text
Font Size
size of POS information
In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS
Font Color
information.
Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in
POS Info
the live view screen.
It does not need to configure. The system goes to a new line 1s
after no data is received.
If you enter a line delimiter, the system goes to a new line when
overlay information identifies the line delimiter (hexadecimal).
Line Break For example, if line delimiter is F and overlay information is
123F6789, the local preview and web overlay information is
displayed as:
123
6789
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.14 Configuring Backup Settings

5.14.1 Finding USB Device

When you inset a USB storage device into the USB port of the Device, the Device detects the USB
storage device and pops up Find USB device page, which provides you a shortcut to perform
backup and upgrading operations.
For details, see "5.14.2 Backing up Files", "5.21.3 Viewing Event Information", "5.20.4 Exporting and
Importing System Settings", and "5.20.6 Updating the Device".

249
 User's Manual
Figure 5-213 Backup device

5.14.2 Backing up Files

You can back up the recorded videos and snapshots.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Backup.

Figure 5-214 Backup

Step 2 Configure the settings for the backup parameters.

Table 5-55 Backup parameters

Parameter Description
In the Device Name list, select the device that you want to back up
Device Name
the files to.

250
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Format.
● If the capacity of external storage device is less than 2 TB, you
Format can select FAT32 or NTFS to format it.
● If the capacity of external storage device is equal to or more
than 2 TB, you can only select NTFS to format it.
Click Browse. Select the route where you want to search for the
Path
files.
In the Record Channel list, select the channel where you want to
Record Channel
search for the files.
Type In the Type list, select the file type that you want to search.
Start Time Enter the start time and end time for the files that you want to
End Time search.

In the File Format list, select the file format as DAV or MP4 that
File Format
you want to search.
Step 3 Click Search to search the files that meet the configured settings.
The searched results will display in the table.
Step 4 Select the files that you want to back up.
Step 5 Click Backup to back up the selected files to the configured path.

Click Remove to remove all the searched results.

The system will display a backup progress bar. A dialog box will be prompted when
backup is completed.

Figure 5-215 Browse

Step 6 Click OK.

251
 User's Manual

5.15 Network Management

5.15.1 Configuring Network Settings

You can ensure the network interworking between the Device and other devices through
configuring the network settings.

5.15.1.1 Configuring TCP/IP Settings

Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, and then you can configure the settings for the Device
such as IP address, DNS according to the networking plan. For details, see "5.1.4.4 Configuring
Network Settings".

5.15.1.2 Configuring Port Settings

You can configure the maximum connection accessing the Device from Client such as web interface,
platform, and mobile client and configure each port settings.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Port.

Figure 5-216 Port

Step 2 Configure the settings for the connection parameters.

252
 User's Manual
Table 5-56 Connection parameters
Parameter Description
The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same
Max Connection time, such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone.
Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 128.
The default value setting is 37777. You can enter the value according
TCP Port
to your actual situation.
The default value setting is 37778. You can enter the value according
UDP Port
to your actual situation.
The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to
your actual situation.
HTTP Port
If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter
70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to
RTSP Port
your actual situation.
Data transmission. The value range is from 1 through 65535. The
POS Port
default value is 38800.
The default value setting is 123. You can enter the value according to
NTP Server Port
your actual situation.
HTTPS communication port. The default value setting is 443. You can
HTTPS Port
enter the value according to your actual situation.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.15.1.3 Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settings

You can make wireless connection between the Device and the other devices in the same network
through Wi-Fi settings, facilitating the devices connection and mobility.

Only the Device with Wi-Fi module supports this function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Wi-Fi.

253
 User's Manual
Figure 5-217 Wi-Fi (1)

Figure 5-218 Wi-Fi (2)

Step 2 Configure the settings for the Wi-Fi connection parameters.

Table 5-57 Wi-Fi connection parameters

Parameter Description
Enable Connect Automatically.
Connect Automatically After the Device is restarted, it will automatically connect to
the nearest hotspot that had been connected successfully.

254
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Refresh the hotspot list. The self-adaption function such as
Refresh adding password is supported if such setting was once
configured.
In the hotpots list, select a hotspot, and then click Connect.
● To reconnect the same hotspot, disconnect first and then
Connect reconnect.
● To connect to other hotspot, disconnect from the current
connected hotspot first, and then connect to the other
hotspot.
Disconnect To disconnect from a hotspot, click Disconnect.
Step 3 (Optional) Click Firmware Update, select related firmware file, and then click OK.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.
After the Device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, in the Wi-Fi Info area, the current
hotspot, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are displayed.

5.15.1.4 Configuring 3G/4G Settings

5.15.1.4.1 Through the Wireless 3G/4G Module

You can connect a wireless 3G/4G module to the USB port of the Device and then access the Device
with the IP address provided by the module.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the wireless 3G/4G module to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > 3G/4G.

255
 User's Manual
Figure 5-219 3G/4G

The 3G/4G page consists of three areas:

● Area 1: Displays the signal strength.
● Area 2: Displays the module configurations.
● Area 3: Displays the connection state.

The information of Area 2 will display after the 3G/4G module is connected; while the
information of Area 1 and Area 3 will display only after the 3G/4G function is enabled.
Step 3 The Device starts identifying the wireless module and displays the recognized information
for the parameters in Area 2.

Table 5-58 Recognized information

Parameter Description
NIC Name Displays the name of Ethernet card.
Displays the network type. Different type represents
Network Type
different supplier.
APN Displays the default APN number.
Dial-up No. Displays the default dial No.
Authentication mode. You can select PAP, CHAP, or
Authentication Type
NO_AUTH.
Enter the username and password for
Username, Password
authentication.
Step 4 Select the Enable checkbox.
Step 5 Click Dial to start connecting.
After the connection is established, the result is displayed in the Wireless Network area.

256
 User's Manual
Figure 5-220 Wireless network

Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.15.1.4.2 Through the External Drive

You can connect the 3G/4G through an external drive.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the external drive to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > 3G/4G.

257
 User's Manual
Figure 5-221 3G/4G

Step 3 Configure the settings. For details, see Table 5-58.

Step 4 Click Firmware Update, select related firmware file, and then click OK.

Figure 5-222 Firmware upgrade

Step 5 Click Apply, and then waiting for the firmware to be installed.

5.15.1.5 Configuring PPPoE Settings

PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network connection by
configuring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address in the WAN. To use this function,

258
 User's Manual
firstly you need to obtain the username and password from the Internet Service Provider.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > PPPoE.

Figure 5-223 PPPoE

Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.

Step 3 In the Username box and Password box, enter the username and password accordingly
provided by the Internet Service Provider.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.
The system pops up a message to indicate the successfully saved. The IP address appears
on the PPPoE page. You can use this IP address to access the Device.

When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the TCP/IP page cannot be
modified.

5.15.1.6 Configuring DDNS Settings

When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically refresh
the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address, ensuring you access the
Device by using the domain.

Prerequisites
Confirm if the Device supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS service
provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.

After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the
information of all the connected devices under this username.

259
 User's Manual

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > DDNS.

Figure 5-224 DDNS

Step 2 Configure the settings for the DDNS parameters.

Table 5-59 DDNS parameters

Parameter Description
Enable the DDNS function.

Enable
After enabling DDNS function, the third-party might collect your Device
information.

Type Type and address of DDNS service provider.

● Type: Dyndns DDNS; address: members.dyndns.org
Server Address ● Type: NO-IP DDNS; address: dynupdate.no-ip.com
● Type: CN99 DDNS; address: members.3322.org
Domain Name The domain name for registering on the website of DDNS service provider.
Username Enter the username and password obtained from DDNS service provider.
You need to register (including username and password) on the website
Password of DDNS service provider.
Interval Enter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Enter the domain name in the browser on your PC, and then press Enter.
If the web page of the Device is displayed, the configuration is successful. If not, the
configuration is failed.

260
 User's Manual

5.15.1.7 Configuring Email Settings

You can configure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notification when
there is an alarm event occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.

Figure 5-225 Email

Step 2 Configure the settings for the email parameters.

Table 5-60 Email parameters

Parameter Description
Enable the email function.
Enable There might be risk of sending data to specified email address after it is
enabled.
SMTP Server Enter the address of SMTP server of sender’s email account.
Enter the port value of SMTP server. The default value setting is 25. You can
Port
enter the value according to your actual situation.
Username
Enter the username and password of sender’s email account.
Password
Anonymous If enable the anonymity function, you can login as anonymity.
In the Receiver list, select the number of receiver that you want to receive
Receiver
the notification. The Device supports up to three mail receivers.
Email Address Enter the email address of mail receiver(s).
Enter the sender’s email address. It supports maximum three senders
Sender
separated by comma.

261
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enter the email subject.
Subject Supports Chinese, English and numerals. It supports maximum 64
characters.
Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event, the system
Attachment
can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.
Select the encryption type: NONE, SSL, or TLS.
Encryption Type
For SMTP server, the default encryption type is TLS.

This is the interval that the system sends an email for the same type of alarm
event, which means, the system does not send an email upon any alarm
Sending Interval event.
(sec.) This setting helps to avoid the large amount of emails caused by frequent
alarm events.
The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.
Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email to check
Health Mail
the connection.
Sending Interval This is the interval that the system sends a health test email.
(Min.) The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no interval.
Click Test to test the email sending function. If the configuration is correct,
the receiver’s email account will receive the email.
Test

Before testing, click Apply to save the settings.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.15.1.8 Configuring UPnP Settings

You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the LAN
through the IP address on the WAN.

Prerequisites
● Log in to the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the WAN.
● Enable the UPnP function at the router.
● Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.
● Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, configure the IP address into the router IP address
range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address automatically.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > UPnP.

262
 User's Manual
Figure 5-226 UPnP

Step 2 Configure the settings for the UPnP parameters.

Table 5-61 UPnP parameters

Parameter Description
Enable the UPnP function.

Port Mapping
After it is enabled, the intranet services and ports shall be
mapped to extranet, proceed with caution.

Indicates the status of UPnP function.

Status ● Offline: Failed.
● Online: Succeeded.
Enter IP address of router on the LAN.

LAN IP
After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address
automatically without performing any configurations.

Enter IP address of router on the WAN.

WAN IP
After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address
automatically without performing any configurations.

263
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
The settings in PAT table correspond to the UPnP PAT table on the
router.
● Service Name: Name of network server.
● Protocol: Type of protocol.
● Int. Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device.
● Ext. Port: External port that is mapped on the router.

● To avoid the conflict, when setting the external port, try to

use the ports from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular
Port Mapping List ports from 1 through 255 and system ports from 256 through
1023.
● When there are several devices in the LAN, reasonably
arrange the ports mapping to avoid mapping to the same
external port.
● When establishing a mapping relationship, ensure the
mapping ports are not occupied or limited.
● The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the
same and cannot be modified.
● Click to modify the external port.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
In the browser, enter http://WAN IP: External IP port. You can visit the LAN Device.

5.15.1.9 Configuring SNMP Settings

You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser to
manage and control the Device from the software. This function is available on select models.

Prerequisites
● Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT
MIB Browser
● Obtain the MIB files that correspond to the current version from the technical support.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > SNMP.

264
 User's Manual
Figure 5-227 SNMP

Step 2 Configure the settings for the SNMP parameters.

Table 5-62 SNMP parameters

Parameter Description
Enable Enable the SNMP function.
Select the checkbox of SNMP version(s) that you are using.
Version
The default version is V3. There is a risk of select V1 or V2.

SNMP Port Indicates the monitoring port on the agent program.

Read Community
Indicates the read/write strings supported by the agent program.
Write Community
Indicates the destination address for the agent program to send
Trap Address
the Trap information.
Indicates the destination port for the agent program to send the
Trap Port
Trap information.
Enter the username that is allowed to access the Device and has
Read-Only Username
the "Read Only" permission.
Enter the username that is allowed to access the Device and has
Read/Write Username
the "Read and Write" permission.
Authentication Type Includes MD5 and SHA. The system recognizes automatically.
Authentication Password Enter the password for authentication type and encryption type.
Encryption Password The password should be no less than eight characters.

In the Encryption Type list, select an encryption type. The

Encryption Type
default setting is CBC-DES.
Step 3 Compile the two MIB files by MIB Builder.

265
 User's Manual
Step 4 Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.
Step 5 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the Device IP that you want to manage, and then
select the version number to query.
Step 6 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the
configurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.

5.15.1.10 Configuring Multicast Settings

When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded, the video
will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the problem.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Multicast.

Figure 5-228 Multicast

Step 2 Configure the settings for the multicast parameters.

Table 5-63 Multicast parameters

Parameter Description
Enable Enable the multicast function.
Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast IP.
IP Address
The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.
Port Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025 through 65000.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
You can use the multicast IP address to log in to the web.
On the web login dialog box, in the Type list, select MULTICAST. The web will
automatically obtain the multicast IP address and join. Then you can view the video
through multicast function.

266
 User's Manual
Figure 5-229 Login

5.15.1.11 Configuring Register Settings

You can register the Device into the specified proxy server which acts as the transit to make it easier
for the client software to access the Device.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Register.

Figure 5-230 Register

Step 2 Configure the settings for the register parameters.

267
 User's Manual
Table 5-64 Register parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the register function.
No. The default value is 1.
Enter the server IP address or the server domain that you
Server IP Address
want to register to.
Port Enter the port of the server.
Sub Service ID This ID is allocated by the server and used for the Device.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.15.1.12 Configuring Alarm Center Settings

You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information. To use this
function, the Report Alarm checkbox must be selected. For details about alarm event settings, see
"5.10 Alarm Events Settings".

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Alarm Center.

Figure 5-231 Alarm center

Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm center parameters.

Table 5-65 Alarm center parameters

Parameter Description
Enable Enable the alarm center function.
In the Protocol Type list, select protocol type. The default is
Protocol Type
ALARM CENTER.

268
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Server Address The IP address and communication port of the PC installed
Port with alarm client.

In the Auto Report Plan list, select time cycle and specific time
Auto Report Plan
for uploading alarm.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.15.1.13 Configuring P2P Settings

You can manage the devices by using P2P technology to download the application and register the
devices. For details, see "5.1.4.5 Configuring P2P Settings".

5.15.2 Configuring Network Testing Settings

5.15.2.1 Testing the Network

You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Network > Test.

Figure 5-232 Network test

Step 2 In the Destination IP box, enter the IP address.

Step 3 Click Test.
After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for
average delay, packet loss, and network status.

269
 User's Manual
Figure 5-233 Test result

5.15.2.2 Capturing Packet and Backing up

Packet capture means the operations such as capturing, resending, and editing data that are sent
and received during network transmission. When there is network abnormality, you can perform
packet capturing and back up into the USB storage device. This date can be provided to the
technical support for analyzing the network condition.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Network > Test.

270
 User's Manual
Figure 5-234 Test

Step 2 Connect a USB storage device to the Device.

Step 3 Click Refresh.
The Device starts detecting the USB storage device and displays its name in the Device
Name box.
Step 4 Select the route of the data that you want to capture and back up.
1) In the Packet Sniffer Backup area, click Browse.

Figure 5-235 Browse

2) Select the route.

271
 User's Manual

● If there are several USB storage devices are connected to the Device, you can select
from the Device Name list.
● Click Refresh to total space, free space and the file list in the selected USB storage
device.
● In the case of insufficient capacity, click to delete the needless files.
● Click New Folder to create a new folder in the USB storage device.
3) Click OK to save the route selection settings.
Step 5 Click to start packet capturing and backing up.

● Only the data packet of one LAN can be captured at one time.
● After capturing starts, you can exit the Test page to perform other operations such as
web login and monitoring.
Step 6 Click to stop capturing.
The backup data is saved in the selected route under the naming style "LAN name-
time.pcap". You can open it by using Wireshark software.

Figure 5-236 Backup data

5.16 Configuring Account Settings

You can add, modify and delete user accounts, groups, and ONVIF users, and set security questions
for admin account.

● The username supports 31 characters and group name supports 15 characters. The username can
be consisted of letter, number, "_", "@", ""..
● You can set maximum 64 users and 20 groups. The group name by "User" and "Admin" cannot be

272
 User's Manual
deleted. You can set other groups and define the relevant permissions. However, the admin
account cannot be set randomly.
● You can manage the account by user and group and the name cannot be repeated. Every user
must belong to a group, and one user only belongs to one group.

5.16.1 Configuring User Account

5.16.1.1 Adding a User Account

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.

Figure 5-237 User

Step 2 Click Add.

273
 User's Manual
Figure 5-238 Add user

Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a user account.

Table 5-66 Parameters of adding user

Parameter Description
Username
Enter a username and password for the account.
Password
Confirm Password Re-enter the password.
Optional.
Remarks
Enter a description of the account.
User MAC Enter user MAC address
Select a group for the account.
Group
The user rights must be within the group permission.

Click Setting to configure the parameters.

Period Define a period during which the new account can log in to
the device. The new account cannot log in to the device
during the time beyond the set period.
Password Expires in Set the password validity period.
In the Permission area, select the checkboxes in the System
tab, Playback tab, and Monitor tab.

Permission To manage the user account easily, when defining the user
account authority, it is recommended not to give the
authority to the common user account higher that the
advanced user account.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

274
 User's Manual

Related Operations
Set the permitted period.
1. Next to Period, click Setting.

Figure 5-239 Setting

2. Define the permitted period. By default, it is active all the time.

● Define the period by drawing.
◇ Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select

the active period.

◇ Define for several days of a week: Click before each day, the icon switches to .
On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods,
all the days with will take the same settings.
◇ Define for all days of a week: Click All, all the switches to . On the timeline of any
day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same
settings.
● Define the period by editing.
a. Click .

Figure 5-240 Period

b. Enter the time frame for the period and select the checkbox to enable the settings.
◇ There are six periods for you to set for each day.

275
 User's Manual
◇ Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific
day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.
c. Click OK to save the settings.
3. Click OK.

5.16.1.2 Modifying a User Account

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.

Figure 5-241 User

Step 2 Click for the user account that you want to modify.

276
 User's Manual
Figure 5-242 Modify

Step 3 Change the settings for password, username, user group, user MAC, memo, password
validity period and authority

The new password can be set from 8 digits through 32 digits and contains at least two
types from number, letter and special characters (excluding"'", """, ";", ":" and "&").
For the admin account, you enable/disable the unlock pattern and modify password hint.
● To use the unlock pattern, enable Unlock Pattern, click , draw a pattern in the
Unlock Pattern page, and then click Save to save the setting.
● Enter password hint text in Password Hint box.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

5.16.1.3 Deleting a User Account

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.

277
 User's Manual
Figure 5-243 User

Step 2 Click for the user account that you want to delete.
Step 3 Click OK to delete a user account.

5.16.2 Configuring Group Account

5.16.2.1 Adding a Group

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.

278
 User's Manual
Figure 5-244 Group

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 5-245 Add group

Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a group.

Table 5-67 Parameters of adding a group

Parameter Description
Group Name Enter a name for the group.
Optional.
Remarks
Enter a description of the account.
In the Permission area, select the checkboxes in the
Permission
System tab, Playback tab, and Monitor tab.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

279
 User's Manual

5.16.2.2 Modifying a Group

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.

Figure 5-246 Group

Step 2 Click for the group account that you want to modify.

Figure 5-247 Modify

Step 3 Change the settings for group name, memo, and authority.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

280
 User's Manual

5.16.2.3 Deleting a Group

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.

Figure 5-248 Group

Step 2 Click for the user account that you want to delete.
Step 3 Click OK to delete a group.

5.16.3 Configuring ONVIF Users

The device manufactured by other company can connect to the Device through ONVIF protocol by
an authorized ONVIF account.

The admin account is created for ONVIF users right after the Device has been initialized.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > ONVIF User.

281
 User's Manual
Figure 5-249 ONVIF user

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 5-250 Add ONVIF user

Step 3 Enter username, password, and select the group that you want this account to belong to.
Step 4 Click OK to save the settings.

Click to modify the account; Click to delete the account.

5.17 Audio Management

Audio management function manages audio files and configures the playing schedule. When there
is an alarm event, the audio file can be activated.

282
 User's Manual

5.17.1 Configuring Audio Files

You can add audio files, listen to audio files, rename and delete audio files, and configure the audio
volume.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > File Management.

Figure 5-251 File management

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 5-252 Add file

Step 3 Select the audio files that you want to import.

283
 User's Manual
Step 4 Click OK to start importing audio files from the USB storage device.
Step 5 If the importing is successful, the audio files will display in the File Management page.

Figure 5-253 Imported file

The imported audio files are automatically saved into the HDD, so you do not need to
connect to the USB storage device to get the file next time.
● Click to play the audio file.
● Click to rename the audio file.
● Click to delete the audio file.
● To decrease or increase the playing volume, move the slider to the left or to the right.

5.17.2 Configuring Playing Schedule for Audio Files

You can configure the settings to play the audio files during the defined time period.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > Audio Play.

Figure 5-254 Audio play

Step 2 Configure the settings for the schedule parameters.

Table 5-68 Schedule parameters

Parameter Description
In the Period box, enter the time. Select the checkbox to enable the settings.
Period
You can configure up to six periods.
In the File Name list, select the audio file that you want to play for this
File Name
configured period.
In the Interval box, enter the time in minutes for how often you want to repeat
Interval
the playing.
Configure how many times you want to repeat the playing in the defined
Repeat
period.

284
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The MIC function
Output Port
shares the same port with talkback function and the latter has the priority.

● The finish time for audio playing is decided by audio file size and the configured
interval.
● Playing priority: Alarm event > Talkback > Audio file > Trial listening.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.18 Storage Management

Storage management function manages the stored resources such as recorded video files and
storage space. The function aims at providing easier operation and improving the storage efficiency.

5.18.1 Configuring Basic Settings

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Basic.

Figure 5-255 Basic

Step 2 Configure the settings for the basic settings parameters.

285
 User's Manual
Table 5-69 Basic settings parameters
Parameter Description
Configure the settings for the situation all the read/write discs are full.
● Select Stop to stop recording.
Disk Full
● Select Overwrite to overwrite the recorded video files always from
the earliest time.
Create Video Files Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.
Delete Expired Files Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, configure the days.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.18.2 Configuring the Recording and Snapshot Schedule

The system starts recording and taking snapshot according to the configured schedule. For details,
see ."5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule" and "5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot
Storage Schedule",

5.18.3 Configuring Disk Manager

You can view the HDD information, format HDD, and configure the HDD type through HDD
manager.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Manager.
In the table, you can view the information of current HDD, such as device name, HDD type,
status, total space and free space, and serial number of the HDD port.

Figure 5-256 Disk manager

286
 User's Manual
Step 2 Configuring the settings for the HDD manager.
● HDD type setting: In the Properties list, select Read/Write, Read Only, and then click
Apply to save the settings.
● HDD format: Select the HDD that you want to format, click Format, and enable Clear
HDD database in the pop-up message, click OK and enter the password of admin user
in the prompted dialog box, click OK and then following the on-screen instructions to
complete formatting.
● Formatting HDD will erase all data on the disk, proceed with caution.

Figure 5-257 Note

5.18.4 Configuring Record

Record type includes auto and manual record. You can configure record type of main stream and
sub stream. See "5.7 Configuring Record Settings".

5.18.5 Configuring Advance Settings

Create HDD group, and save main stream, sub stream and snapshot of designated channels to the
HDD group.

● If the page prompts that the current HDD mode is quota group, click Switch to Disk Group
Mode, and then configure HDD group.
● You can enable either HDD Group Mode or Quota Group. The system prompts to reboot the
device each time when you switch the mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Group > Disk Group.

287
 User's Manual
Figure 5-258 Disk group

Step 2 Select group for each HDD, and then click Apply to complete the settings.
Step 3 After configuring HDD group, click Main Stream, Sub Stream and Snapshot tabs
respectively, to configure the saving of main stream, sub stream and snapshot information
of different channels to different HDD groups.

Figure 5-259 Main stream

288
 User's Manual
Figure 5-260 Sub stream

Figure 5-261 Snapshot

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.18.6 Configuring Disk Quota

By configuring quota, allocate fixed storage capacity to each channel, and distribute the storage

289
 User's Manual
space of each channel reasonably.

● If the page displays that Disk group mode selected, click Switch to Quota Mode, and then
configure quota.
● You can enable either HDD Group Mode or Quota Group. The system prompts to restart the
device each time when you switch the mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Quota.
Step 2 Configure the disk quota.
● For one-HDD devices, click , select a channel and then configure the
parameters including recording duration, bit rate, storage capacity of pictures.

Figure 5-262 Disk quota (one-HDD device)

● For devices that support 2 or more HDDs, you can switch the quota mode between
version 1 and version 2.
◇ V1: Select a channel and then configure the disk quota for each disk.
◇ V2: Select a channel and then configure the parameters including recording
duration, bit rate, storage capacity of pictures.

290
 User's Manual
Figure 5-263 Version 1

Figure 5-264 Version 2

Step 3 Click Apply.

291
 User's Manual

5.18.7 Configuring HDD Detecting Settings

This function is available on select models.

HDD detecting function detects the current status of HDD to let you know the HDD performance
and replace the defective HDD.

5.18.7.1 Checking HDD

You can detect HDD by key area detect and global detect.
● Key area detect: Detect the files saved in HDD. The detected bad track can be repaired by
formatting. If there are no files in HDD, the system cannot detect the bad track.
● Global detect: Detect the whole HDD through Windows, which takes time and might affect the
HDD that is recording the video.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Check > Manual Check.

Figure 5-265 Manual check

Step 2 In the Type list, select Key Area Detect or Global Check; and in the Disk list, select the
HDD that you want to detect.
Step 3 Click Start Check.
The system starts detecting the HDD.

During detecting, click Pause to pause detecting, click Continue to restart detecting, and
click Stop Detect to stop detecting.

292
 User's Manual
Figure 5-266 Start check

5.18.7.2 View Detecting Results

After the detecting is completed, you can view the detecting reports to find out the problem and
replace the defective HDD to avoid data loss.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Check > Check Report.

Figure 5-267 Check report

Step 2 Click .
You can view detecting results and S.M.A.R.T reports.

293
 User's Manual
Figure 5-268 Results

Figure 5-269 S.M.A.R.T

5.18.8 Configuring Record Estimate

Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD
capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Rec Estimate.

294
 User's Manual
Figure 5-270 Rec estimate

Step 2 Click .
You can configure the resolution, frame rate, bit rate and record time for the selected
channel.
Step 3 Click OK to save the settings.
Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according to
the channels settings and HDD capacity.

Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.

Related Operations
● Calculate recording time.
1. On the Rec Estimate page, click the By Space tab.

Figure 5-271 By space

2. Click Select.
3. Select the checkbox of the HDD that you want to calculate.
In the By Time tab, in the Time box, the recording time is displayed.

295
 User's Manual
Figure 5-272 By time

● Calculate HDD capacity for storage.

1. On the Rec Estimate page, click the By Time tab.

Figure 5-273 By time

2. In the Time box, enter the time period that you want to record.In the Total Space box, the
required HDD capacity is displayed.

Figure 5-274 Total space

5.18.9 Configuring FTP Storage Settings

You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.

Prerequisites
Purchase or download a FTP server and install it on your PC.

For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of recorded
videos and snapshots might be failed.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > FTP.

296
 User's Manual
Figure 5-275 FTP

Step 2 Configure the settings for the FTP settings parameters.

Table 5-70 FTP settings parameters

Parameter Description
Enable Enable the FTP upload function.
● FTP: Plaintext transmission.
FTP type
● SFTP: Encrypted transmission (recommended)
Server Address IP address of FTP server.
● FTP: The default is 21.
Port
● SFTP: The default is 22.
Anonymous Enter the username and password to log in to the FTP server.
Username Enable the anonymity function, and then you can login
Password anonymously without entering the username and password.

Create folder on FTP server.

● If you do not enter the name of remote directory, system
automatically creates the folders according to the IP and
Storage Path time.
● If you enter the name of remote directory, the system
creates the folder with the entered name under the FTP
root directory first, and then automatically creates the
folders according to the IP and time.

297
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video.
● If the entered length is less than the recorded video length,
only a section of the recorded video can be uploaded.
File Size ● If the entered length is more than the recorded video
length, the whole recorded video can be uploaded.
● If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be
uploaded.
● If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system
takes the recent snapshot to upload. For example, the
interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 2 seconds per
snapshot, the system uploads the recent snapshot every 5
seconds.
● If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system
Picture Upload Interval (Sec.)
uploads the snapshot per the snapshot interval. For
example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is
10 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the snapshot
every 10 seconds.
● To configure the snapshot interval, select Main Menu >
CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.
Channel Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.
Day Select the week day and set the time period that you want to
upload the recorded files. You can set two periods for each
Period 1, Period 2 week day.
Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you
Record type want to upload. The selected record type will be uploaded
during the configured time period.
Step 3 Click Test.
The system pops up a message to indicate success or failure. If failed, check the network
connection or configurations.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.19 Security Center

You can set security options to strengthen device security and use the device in a much safer way.

5.19.1 Security Status

Security scanning helps get a whole picture of device security status. You can scan user, service and
security module status for detailed information about the security status of the device.

Detecting User and Service

298
 User's Manual

Green icon represents a healthy status of the scanned item, and orange icon represents a risky
status.
● Login authentication: When there’s a risk in the login authentication, the icon will be in orange to
warn risk. You can click Details to see the detailed risk description.
● Configuration Security: When there’s a risk in the device configuration, the icon will be in orange
to warn risk. You can click Details to see the detailed risk description.

Figure 5-276 Security status

Scanning Security Modules

This area shows the running status of security modules. For details about the security modules,
move mouse pointer on the icon to see the on-screen instructions.

Scanning Security Status

You can click Rescan to scan security status.

5.19.2 System Service

You can set DVR basic information such as basic services, 802.1x and HTTPS.

5.19.2.1 Basic Services

Procedure
Step 1 Select SECURITY > Main Menu > System Service > Basic Services.

299
 User's Manual
Figure 5-277 Basic services

Step 2 Select Basic Services and configure parameters.

There might be safety risk when Mobile Push Notifications, CGI, ONVIF, SSH and NTP
Server is enabled.

Table 5-71 Basic services parameters

Parameter Description
After enabling this function, the alarm triggered by the Device can
be pushed to a mobile phone. This function is enabled by default.
Mobile Push Notifications
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.

If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through

the CGI protocol. This function is enabled by default.
CGI
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.

If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through

the ONVIF protocol. This function is enabled by default.
ONVIF
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.

300
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
After enabling this function, a NTP server can be used to
NTP Server
synchronize the device. This function is enabled by default.
After enabling this function, you can use SSH service. This function is
disabled by default.
SSH
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.

After enabling this function, the device can be searched by other

Enable Device Discovery
devices.
● Security Mode (Recommended): Uses Digest access
Private Protocol authentication when connecting to DVR.
Authentication Mode ● Compatible Mode: Select this mode when the client does not
support Digest access authentication.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.19.2.2 802.1x
The device needs to pass 802.1x certification to enter the LAN.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > System Service > 802.1x.

Figure 5-278 802.1x

Step 2 Select the Ethernet card you want to certify.

Step 3 Select Enable and configure parameters.

301
 User's Manual
Table 5-72 802.1x parameters
Parameter Description
NIC Name Select a NIC.
● PEAP: protected EAP protocol.
Authentication ● TLS: Transport Layer Security. Provide privacy and data integrity
between two communications application programs.
Enable it and click Browse to import CA certificate from flash drive.
CA Certificate For details about importing and creating a certificate, see "5.19.4 CA
Certificate".
Username The username shall be authorized at server.
Password Password of the corresponding username.
Step 4 Click Apply.

5.19.2.3 HTTPS
We recommend that you enable HTTPS function to enhance system security.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > System Service > HTTPS.

Figure 5-279 HTTPS

Step 2 Select Enable to enable HTTPS function.

Step 3 Click Certificate Management to create or import a HTTPS certificate from USB drive. For
details about importing or creating a CA certificate, see "5.19.4 CA Certificate".
Step 4 Select a HTTPS certificate.
Step 5 Click Apply

302
 User's Manual

5.19.3 Attack Defense

5.19.3.1 Firewall

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Firewall.
Step 2 Select Enable to enable firewarll.
Step 3 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-73 Firewall parameters

Parameter Description
Mode can be configured when Type is Network Access.
● If Allowlist is enabled, you can visit device port
Mode successfully with IP/MAC hosts in the allowlist.
● If Blocklist is enabled, you cannot visit device port with
IP/MAC hosts in blocklist.
When Type is Network Access, you can configure IP
Add
Address, IP Segment and MAC Address.
Type You can select IP address, IP segment and MAC address.
IP Address Enter IP Address, Start Port and End Port that is allowed or
forbidden.
Start Port

When Type is IP Address, they can be configured. Start

End Port Port and End Port can be configured only in Network
Access Type.

Enter Start Address and End Address of IP Segment.

Start Address/End Address

When Type is IP Segment, they can be configured.

Enter MAC Address that is allowed or forbidden

MAC Address
When Type is MAC Address, it can be configured.

Step 4 Click Apply.

5.19.3.2 Account Lockout

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Account Lockout.
Step 2 Set parameters.

303
 User's Manual
Table 5-74 Lockout parameters
Parameter Description
Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password entries. The
account will be locked after your entries exceed the maximum number.
Attempt(s)
Value range: 5–30.
Default value: 5.
Set how long the account is locked for.
Lock Time Value range: 5–120 minutes.
Default value: 5 minutes.
Step 3 Click Apply.

5.19.3.3 Anti-Dos Attack

You can enable SYN Flood Attack Defense and ICMP Flood Attack Defense to defend the device
against Dos attack.

Figure 5-280 Anti-Dos attack

5.19.3.4 Sync Time-Allowlist

The synchronization is only allowed with hosts in the trusted list.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Sync Time-Allowlist.
Step 2 Select Enable to enable the function.
Step 3 Configure the parameters.

304
 User's Manual
Table 5-75 Time-allowlist parameters
Parameter Description
Add You can add trusted hosts for time synchronization.
Type Select IP address or IP segment for hosts to be added.
Input the IP address of a trusted host.
IP Address
When Type is IP Address, it can be configured

Input the start IP address of trusted hosts.

Start Address
When Type is IP Segment, it can be configured

Input the end IP address of trusted hosts.

End Address
When Type is IP Segment, it can be configured.
Step 4 Click Apply.

5.19.4 CA Certificate
You can create or import device certificate and install trusted CA Certificate.

5.19.4.1 Device Certificate

Creating Certificate
1. Select Main Menu > SECURITY > CA Certificate > Device Certificate.

● Click to download the certificate to local storage.

● Click to delete the certificate. The deleted certificate cannot be restored, proceed with
caution.

305
 User's Manual
Figure 5-281 Device certificate

2. Configure parameters.

Table 5-76 Device certificate parameters

Parameter Description
Country/Region This parameter is user defined.
State This parameter is user defined.
City Name This parameter is user defined.
Valid Period Enter a valid period for the certificate.
Organization This parameter is user defined.
Organization Unit This parameter is user defined.
Domain Name Enter the IP address of the certificate.
3. Click Create.

CA Application and Import

Follow the on-screen instructions to finish CA application and import.

Insert a USB flash drive before operating.

306
 User's Manual
Figure 5-282 CA application and import

Import Third-Party Certificate

Insert the USB flash drive with third-party certificate before importing.
1. Select Import Third-party Certificate.

Figure 5-283 Import third-party certificate

2. Configure the parameters.

Table 5-77 Import third-party certificate

Parameter Description
Click Browse to find the third-party certificate path on
Path
the USB drive.

307
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Click Browse to find the third-party certificate private
Private Key
key on the USB drive.
Input the password of encrypted private key. When the
Private Key Password private key is not encrypted, you don’t need to this
parameter.
3. Click Create.

5.19.4.2 Trusted CA Certificate

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > CA Certificate > Trusted Certificate.
Step 2 Click Install Trusted Certificate.

Figure 5-284 Install certificate

Step 3 Click Browse to select the certificate that you want to install.
Step 4 Click Import.

5.19.5 Audio/Video Encryption

The device supports audio and video encryption during data transmission.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > A/V Encryption > Audio/Video Transmission.

308
 User's Manual
Figure 5-285 Audio/video transmission

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-78 Transmission parameters

Parameter Description
Enable stream frame encryption by using private
protocol.
Enable
There might be safety vulnerability if this service
Private is disabled.
Protocol Encryption Type Use the default setting.
Secret key update period.
Update Period of Secret Value range: 0–720 hours. 0 means never update
Key the secret key.
Default value: 12.
Enables RTSP stream encryption by using TLS.

Enable There might be data breach if this service is

disabled. We recommend that you enable this
RTSP over TLS function.

Select a device
Select a device certificate for RTSP over TLS.
certificate
For details about certificate management, see
Certificate Management
"5.19.4 CA Certificate".
Step 3 Click Apply.

309
 User's Manual

5.19.6 Security Warning

5.19.6.1 Security Exception

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Security Warning > Security Exception.

Figure 5-286 Security exception

Step 2 Select Enable and then configure the parameters.

Table 5-79 Security exception parameters

Parameter Description
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm
Alarm-out Port output port. When an alarm occurs, the DVR device transmits the alarm
information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time
Post-Alarm
range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Checkbox to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the
Alarm Tone
dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.
Select the checkbox, the DVR device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.

310
 User's Manual

Parameter Description
Select the checkbox. When an alarm occurs, the DVR device sends an
email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
Menu > NETWORK > Email.

Security Event monitoring explanation. It indicates the type of attacks

that can trigger security exception.
● Unauthorized executable program trying to run
● Web URL brute-force attack
● Session connection overload
● Session ID brute-force attack
Step 3 Click Apply.

5.19.6.2 Illegal Login

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Security Warning > Illegal Login.

Figure 5-287 Illegal login

Step 2 Select Enable and then configure the parameters.

311
 User's Manual
Table 5-80 Illegal login parameters
Parameter Description
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens) is connected to the alarm
Alarm-out Port output port. When an alarm occurs, the device transmits the
alarm information to the alarm device.
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time.
Post-Alarm
The time range is from 0 seconds through 300 seconds.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from
Alarm Tone the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm
occurs.
Select the checkbox, the device records the alarm information in
Log
the log when an alarm occurs.
Select the checkbox. When an alarm occurs, the device sends an
email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
Send Email
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Step 3 Click Apply.

5.20 Configuring System Settings

5.20.1 Configuring General System Settings

You can configure the device basic settings, time settings, and holiday settings.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Holiday.

312
 User's Manual
Figure 5-288 Holiday

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 5-289 Add holiday

Step 3 Configure the holiday name, repeat mode, time range according to your actual situation.
Step 4 Click Add.

Enable the Add More function, so you can continue adding holiday information.

313
 User's Manual
Figure 5-290 Added holiday

5.20.2 Configuring RS-232 Settings

Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > RS232, and then you can configure serial port function, baud rate
and other parameters.

Only some series products support this RS-232.

Figure 5-291 RS-232

314
 User's Manual
Table 5-81 RS-232 parameters
Parameter Description
Select serial port control protocol. It is Console by default.
● Console: Upgrade the program and debug with the console
and mini terminal software.
● Keyboard: Control this Device with special keyboard.
Function ● Adapter: Connect with PC directly for transparent
transmission of data.
● Protocol COM: Configure the function to protocol COM, in
order to overlay card number.
● PTZ Matrix: Connect matrix control.
Baud Rate Select baud rate, which is 115200 by default.
Data Bits It ranges from 5 to 8, which is 8 by default.
Stop Bits It includes 1 and 2.
Parity It includes none, odd, even, mark and null. It is none by default.

5.20.3 Configuring System Maintenance Settings

When the Device has been running for a long time, you can configure the auto reboot when the
Device is not working. You can also configure the case fan mode to reduce noise and extend the
service life.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Maintenance.

315
 User's Manual
Figure 5-292 Maintenance

Step 2 Configure the settings for the system maintenance parameters.

Table 5-82 Maintenance parameters

Parameter Description
Auto Reboot In the Auto Reboot list, select the reboot time.
In the Case Fan Mode list, you can select Always or Auto. If you select
Auto, the case fan will stop or start according to the external conditions
such as the Device temperature.
Case Fan Mode
This function is available on select models, and it is only supported on the
local configuration page.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.20.4 Exporting and Importing System Settings

You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require the
same setup.

● The IMP/EXP page cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the other pages.
● When you open the IMP/EXP page, the system refreshes the devices and sets the current
directory as the first root directory.
● Click Format to format the USB storage device.

Exporting System Settings

316
 User's Manual
1. Select Main Menu MAINTAIN > Manager > Import/Export.

Figure 5-293 Import/Export

2. Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.
3. Click Refresh to refresh the page.

Figure 5-294 Connected device

4. Click Export.

317
 User's Manual
There is a folder under the name style of "Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]". Double-click this folder
to view the backup files.

Importing System Settings

1. Insert a USB storage device containing the exported configuration files from another Device) into
one of the USB ports on the Device.
2. Select Main MenuSYSTEMImport/Export.
3. Click Refresh to refresh the page.
4. Click on the configuration folder (under the name style of "Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]") that
you want to import.
5. Click Import.
The Device will reboot after the imported is succeeded.

5.20.5 Restoring Default Settings

You can select the settings that you want to restore to the factory default.

Only Admin account supports this function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager> Default.

Figure 5-295 Default

Step 2 Restore the settings.

● Click Default to restore all parameters to default settings except parameters such as
network, user management.

318
 User's Manual
● Click Factory Default, select OK and then enter the password of admin user in the
prompted dialog box to completely recover device parameters to factory default.

5.20.6 Updating the Device

5.20.6.1 Updating File

Procedure
Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Update.

Figure 5-296 Update

Step 3 Click Update.

319
 User's Manual
Figure 5-297 Browse

Step 4 Click the file that you want to upgrade.

Step 5 Click OK.

5.20.6.2 Performing Online Upgrade

When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the
system.
Before using this function, you need to check whether there is any new version by auto check or
manual check.
● Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.
● Manual check: Perform real-time check whether there is any new version available.

Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the
upgrading might be failed.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Update.

320
 User's Manual
Figure 5-298 Update

Step 2 Check whether there is any new version available.

● Auto check: Enable Auto-check for updates.
● Manual check: Click Manual Check.
Step 3 If a new version is available, click Upgrade now.

5.20.6.3 Uboot Upgrading

● Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be "u-boot.bin.img" file and
"update.img" file saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.
● Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be performed.
When starting the Device, the system automatically checks whether there is a USB storage device
connected and if there is any upgrade file, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade file is
correct, the system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that you
have to upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.

5.20.7 Exporting Intelligent Diagnosis Data

When an error occurs, go to Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Intelligent Diagnosis to export intelligent
diagnosis data for troubleshooting. The maintenance tasks, such as the import and export of
configuration, can be performed in COS Pro Portal. For details, see the corresponding user's manual.

321
 User's Manual

5.21 Viewing Information

You can view the information such as log information, HDD information, and version details

5.21.1 Viewing Version Details

You can view the version details such as device model, system version, and build date.
Select Main Menu > INFO > VERSION.

Figure 5-299 Version

5.21.2 Viewing Log Information

Background Information
You can view and search the log information.

● If there is HDD installed, the logs about system operations are saved in the memory of the Device
and other types of logs are saved into the HDD. If there is no HDD installed, the other types of
logs are also saved in the memory of the Device.
● When formatting the HDD, the logs will not be lost. However, if you take out the HDD from the
Device, the logs might be lost.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > INFO > LOG.

322
 User's Manual
Figure 5-300 Log

Step 2 In the Type list, select the log type that you want to view (System, Config, Storage,
Record, Account, Clear, Playback, and Connection) or select All to view all logs.
Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period to search, and then click
Search.

Figure 5-301 Search results

● Click Details or double-click the log that you want to view, the Detailed Information

323
 User's Manual
page is displayed. Click Next or Previous to view more log information.
● Click Backup to back up the logs into the USB storage device. You can enable Backup
Encryption and then set a password. The password is required to open the exported
file.
● Click Clear to remove all logs.

5.21.3 Viewing Event Information

You can view the event information of the Device and channel.
Select Main Menu > INFO > EVENT.

Figure 5-302 Event

5.21.4 Viewing Network Information

You can view the online users, network data transmission details, and test network. For details about
testing network, see "5.15.2.1 Testing the Network".

5.21.4.1 Viewing Online Users

You can view the online user information and block any user for a period of time.
Select Main Menu > INFO > NETWORK > Online users.

324
 User's Manual
Figure 5-303 Online user

To block an online user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The
maximum value you can set is 65535.
The system detects every 5 seconds to check whether there is any user added or deleted, and update
the user list timely.

5.21.4.2 Viewing the Network Load

Network load means the data flow which measures the transmission capability. You can view the
information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.

Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > INFO > NETWORK > Network Load.

325
 User's Manual
Figure 5-304 Network load

Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example, LAN1.
The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.

● The default display is LAN1 load.

● Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.

5.21.5 Viewing HDD Information

You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T information.
Select Main Menu > INFO > HDD.

326
 User's Manual
Figure 5-305 HDD

Table 5-83 HDD parameters

Parameter Description
Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD.
No.
The asterisk (*) means the current working HDD.
Device Name Indicates name of HDD.
Physical Position Indicates installation position of HDD.
Type Indicates HDD type.
Total Space Indicates the total capacity of HDD.
Free Space Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.
Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working
Status
normally.
S.M.A.R.T View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.

5.21.6 Viewing Channel Information

You can view the camera information connected to each channel.
Select Main Menu > INFO > CHANNEL INFO.

327
 User's Manual
Figure 5-306 Channel information

5.21.7 Viewing Data Stream Information

You can view the real-time data stream rate and resolution of each channel.
Select Main Menu > INFO > BPS.

Figure 5-307 BPS

328
 User's Manual

5.22 Logging out of the Device

On the upper-right corner of the Main Menu page or on any page after you have entered the Main
Menu, click .
● Select Logout, you will log out of the device.
● Select Reboot, the Device will be rebooted.
● Select Shutdown, the Device will be turned off.

329
 User's Manual

6 Web Operations

● The pages in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The
actual page might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency
between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
● The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions
described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
● Besides the web interface, you can use our Smart PSS to log in to the device. For detailed
information, please refer to Smart PSS user’s manual.

6.1 Connecting to Network

● The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.

● The Device supports monitoring on different browsers such as Safari, fire fox, Google on Apple
PC to perform the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device
parameters configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.
Step 2 Configure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For details
about network configuration of the Device, see "5.1.4.4 Configuring Network Settings".
Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using "ping ***.***.***.***".
Usually the return value of TTL is 255.

6.2 Logging in to the Web Interface

Procedure
Step 1 Open the IE browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter.

330
 User's Manual
Figure 6-1 Login

Step 2 Enter the username and password.

● The default administrator account is admin. The password is the one that was
configured during initial settings. To security your account, it is recommended to keep
the password properly and change it regularly.
● Click to display the password.
Step 3 Click Login.

6.3 Introducing Web Main Menu

After you have logged in to the web interface, the main menu is displayed.

331
 User's Manual
Figure 6-2 Main menu

Table 6-1 Main menu description

No. Icon Description
Includes configuration menu through which you can
configure camera settings, network settings, storage
1
settings, system settings, account settings, and view
information.
2 None Displays system date and time.
When you point to , the current user account is
3
displayed.
Click , select Logout, Reboot, or Shutdown according
4
to your actual situation.
Displays Cell Phone Client and Device SN QR Code.
● Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the
QR code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client,
and then you can start accessing the Device from your
cell phone.
5 ● Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR
code. Go to the P2P management platform and add the
Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and
manage the device in the WAN. For details, please refer
to the P2P operation manual. You can also configure
P2P function in the local configurations. See "5.1.4.5
Configuring P2P Settings".
6 Displays the web main menu.

332
 User's Manual

No. Icon Description

Includes eight function tiles: LIVE, VIDEO, ALARM, IoT, AI,
BACKUP, DISPLAY, and AUDIO. Click each tile to open the
configuration page of the tile.
● LIVE: You can perform the operations such as viewing
real-time video, configuring channel layout, setting PTZ
controls, and using smart talk and instant record
functions if needed.
● VIDEO: Search for and play back the recorded video
saved on the Device.
● ALARM: Search for alarm information and configure
alarm event actions.
● AI: Configure face detection, face recognition, and IVS
7 None functions.
● IoT: You can view, search and export the temperature
and humidity data of camera and configure the alarm
event settings.
● BACKUP: Search and back up the video files to the local
PC or external storage device such as USB storage
device.
● DISPLAY: Configure the display effect such as
displaying content, image transparency, and resolution,
and enable the zero-channel function.
● AUDIO: Manage audio files and configure the playing
schedule. The audio file can be played in response to an
alarm event if the voice prompts function is enabled.

6.4 Viewing Open-source Software Notice

Log in to the web, select MAINTAIN > System Info > Legal Info, and then click View to view open-
source software notice.

333
 User's Manual
Figure 6-3 Legal information

334
 User's Manual

7 FAQ

1. DVR cannot boot up properly.

There are following possibilities:
● Input power is not correct.
● Power connection is not correct.
● Power switch button is damaged.
● Program upgrade is wrong.
● HDD malfunction or something wrong with HDD jumper configuration.
● Seagate DB35.1, DB35.2, SV35 or Maxtor 17-g has compatibility problem. Please upgrade to
the latest version to solve this problem.
● Front panel error.
● Main board is damaged.
2. DVR frequently shuts down or stops running.
There are following possibilities:
● Input voltage is not stable or it is too low.
● HDD malfunction or something wrong with jumper configuration.
● Button power is not enough.
● Front video signal is not stable.
● Working environment is too harsh, too much dust.
● Hardware malfunction.
3. Hard disk cannot be detected.
There are following possibilities:
● HDD is broken.
● HDD jumper is damaged.
● HDD cable connection is loose.
● Main board SATA port is broken.
4. There is no video output whether it is one-channel, multiple-channel or all-channel output.
There are following possibilities:
● Program is not compatible. Please upgrade to the latest version.
● Brightness is 0. Please restore factory default setup.
● There is no video input signal or it is too weak.
● Check privacy mask setup or your screen saver.
● DVR hardware malfunctions.
5. Real-time video color is distorted.
There are following possibilities:
● When using BNC output, NTSC and PAL setup is not correct. The real-time video becomes
black and white.
● DVR and monitor resistance is not compatible.
● Video transmission is too long or degrading is too huge.
● DVR color or brightness setup is not correct.
6. Cannot search local records.
There are following possibilities:

335
 User's Manual
● HDD jumper is damaged.
● HDD is broken.
● Upgraded program is not compatible.
● The recorded file has been overwritten.
● Record function has been disabled.
7. Video is distorted when searching local records.
There are following possibilities:
● Video quality setup is too low.
● Program read error, bit data is too small. There is mosaic in the full screen. Please restart the
DVR to solve this problem.
● HDD data jumper error.
● HDD malfunction.
● DVR hardware malfunctions.
8. No audio under monitor state.
There are following possibilities:
● It is not a power picker.
● It is not a power acoustics.
● Audio cable is damaged.
● DVR hardware malfunctions.
9. There is audio under monitor state but no audio under playback state.
There are following possibilities:
● Setup is not correct. Please enable audio function.
● Corresponding channel has no video input. Playback is not continuous when the screen is
blue.
10. System time is not correct.
There are following possibilities:
● Setup is not correct.
● Battery contact is not correct or voltage is too low.
● Crystal oscillator is broken.
11. Cannot control PTZ on DVR.
There are following possibilities:
● Front panel PTZ error.
● PTZ decoder setup, connection or installation is not correct.
● Cable connection is not correct.
● PTZ setup is not correct.
● PTZ decoder and DVR protocol is not compatible.
● PTZ decoder and DVR address is not compatible.
● When there are several decoders, please add 120 Ohm between the PTZ decoder A/B cables
furthest end to delete the reverberation or impedance matching. Otherwise the PTZ control is
not stable.
● The distance is too far.
12. Motion detection function does not work.
There are following possibilities:
● Period setup is not correct.
● Motion detection zone setup is not correct.

336
 User's Manual
● Sensitivity is too low.
● For some versions, there is hardware limit.
13. Cannot log in client-end or web.
There are following possibilities:
● For Windows 98 or Windows ME user, please update your system to Windows 2000 sp4. Or
you can install client-end software of lower version. Please note right now, our DVR is not
compatible with Windows VISTA control.
● ActiveX control has been disabled.
● No dx8.1 or higher. Please upgrade display card driver.
● Network connection error.
● Network setup error.
● Password or username is invalid.
● Client-end is not compatible with DVR program.
14. There is only mosaic no video when preview or playback video file remotely.
There are following possibilities:
● Network fluency is not good.
● Client-end resources are limit.
● There is multiple-cast group setup in DVR. This mode can result in mosaic. Usually we do not
recommend this mode.
● There is privacy mask or channel protection setup.
● Current user has no right to monitor.
● DVR local video output quality is not good.
15. Network connection is not stable.
There are following possibilities:
● Network is not stable.
● IP address conflict.
● MAC address conflict.
● PC or DVR network card is not good.
16. Burn error /USB back error.
There are following possibilities:
● Burner and DVR are in the same data cable.
● System uses too much CPU resources. Please stop record first and then begin backup.
● Data amount exceeds backup device capacity. It might result in burner error.
● Backup device is not compatible.
● Backup device is damaged.
17. Keyboard cannot control DVR.
There are following possibilities:
● DVR serial port setup is not correct.
● Address is not correct.
● When there are several switchers, power supply is not enough.
● Transmission distance is too far.
18. Alarm signal cannot be disarmed.
There are following possibilities:
● Alarm setup is not correct.
● Alarm output has been open manually.

337
 User's Manual
● Input device error or connection is not correct.
● Some program versions might have this problem. Please upgrade your system.
19. Alarm function is null.
There are following possibilities:
● Alarm setup is not correct.
● Alarm cable connection is not correct.
● Alarm input signal is not correct.
● There are two loops connect to one alarm device.
20. Remote control does not work.
There are following possibilities:
● Remote control address is not correct.
● Distance is too far or control angle is too small.
● Remote control battery power is low.
● Remote control is damaged or DVR front panel is damaged.
21. Record storage period is not enough.
There are following possibilities:
● Camera quality is too low. Lens is dirty. Camera is installed against the light. Camera aperture
setup is not correct.
● HDD capacity is not enough.
● HDD is damaged.
22. Cannot playback the downloaded file.
There are following possibilities:
● There is no media player.
● No DXB8.1 or higher graphic acceleration software.
● There is no DivX503Bundle.exe control when you play the file transformed to AVI via media
player.
● No DivX503Bundle.exe or ffdshow-2004 1012 .exe in Windows XP OS.
23. Forgot local menu operation password or network password
Please contact your local service engineer or our sales person for help. We can guide you to solve
this problem.
24. When I log in via HTTPS, a dialogue says the certificate for this website is for other address.
Create server certificate again.
25. When I log in via HTTPS, a dialogue says the certificate is not trusted.
Download root certificate again.
26. When I log in via HTTPS, a dialogue says the certificate has expired or is not valid yet.
Make sure your PC time is the same as the device time.
27. I connect the general analog camera to the device, there is no video output.
There are following possibilities:
● Check camera power supplying, data cable connection and other items.
● This series device does not support the analog camera of all brands. Please make sure the
device supports general standard definition analog camera.
28. I connect the standard definition analog camera or the coaxial camera to the device, there
is no video output.
There are following possibilities:
● Check camera power supplying, or camera data cable connection.

338
 User's Manual
● For the product supports analog standard definition camera/HD camera, you need to go to
the Main Menu > CAMERA > CHANNEL TYPE to select corresponding channel type and then
restart the DVR.
29. I cannot connect to the IP channel.
There are following possibilities:
● Check the camera is online or not.
● Check IP channel setup is right or not (such as IP address, username, password, connection
protocol, and port number).
● The camera has set the allowlist (Only the specified devices can connect to the camera).
30. After I connected to the IP channel, the one-window output is OK, but there is no multiple-
window output.
There are following possibilities:
● Check the sub stream of the camera has been enabled or not.
● Check the sub stream type of the camera is H.264 or not.
● Check the device supports camera sub stream resolution or not (such as 960H, D1, and HD1).
31. After I connected to the IP channel, the multiple-window output is OK, but there is no one-
window output.
There are following possibilities:
● Check there is video from the IP channel or not. Please go to the Main Menu > INFO > BPS to
view bit stream real-time information.
● Check the main stream of the camera has been enabled or not.
● Check the main stream type of the camera is H.264 or not.
● Check the device supports camera main stream resolution or not (such as 960H, D1, and HD1).
● Check camera network transmission has reached the threshold or not. Check the online user
of the camera.
32. After I connected to the IP channel, there is no video output in the one-window or the
multiple-window mode. But I can see there is bit stream.
There are following possibilities:
● Check the main stream/sub stream type of the camera is H.264 or not.
● Check the device supports camera main stream/sub stream resolution or not (such as 1080P,
720P, 960H, D1, and HD1).
● Check the camera setup. Please make sure It supports the products of other manufacturers.
33. DDNS registration failed or cannot access the device domain name.
There are following possibilities:
● Check the device is connected to the WAN. Please check the device has got the IP address if
the PPPoE can dial. If there is a router, please check the router to make sure the device IP is
online.
● Check the corresponding protocol of the DDNS is enabled. Check the DDNS function is OK or
not.
● Check DNS setup is right or not. Default Google DNS server is 8.8.8.8, 8.8.5.5. You can use
different DNS provided by your ISP.
34. I cannot use the P2P function on my cell phone or the web.
There are following possibilities:
● Check the device P2P function is enabled or not. (Main menu- > Setting- > Network- > P2P)
● Check the device is in the WAN or not.

339
 User's Manual
● Check cell phone P2P login mode is right or not.
● It is the specified device P2P login port or not when you are using P2P client.
● Check username or password is right or not.
● Check P2P SN is right or not. You can use the cell phone to scan the QR code on the device
P2P page (Main Menu > Network > P2P), or you can use the version information of the WEB
to confirm. (For some previous series products, the device SN is the main board SN, it might
result in error.)
35. I connect the standard definition camera to the device, there is no video output.
There are following possibilities:
● Check the DVR supports standard definition signal or not. Only some series product supports
analog standard definition signal, coaxial signal input.
● Check channel type is right or not. For the product supports analog standard definition
camera/HD camera, you need to go to the Main Menu > CAMERA > CHANNEL TYPE to
select corresponding channel type (such as analog) and then restart the DVR. In this way, the
DVR can recognize the analog standard definition.
● Check camera power supplying, or camera data cable connection.
36. I cannot connect to the IP camera.
There are following possibilities:
● Check DVR supports IP channel or not. Only some series products support A/D switch
function, it can switch analog channel to the IP channel to connect to the IP camera. From
Main Menu > CAMERA > CHANNEL TYPE, select the last channel to switch to the IP channel.
Some series product products support IP channel extension, it supports N+N mode.
● Check the IPC and the DVR is connected or not. Please go to the Main Menu > CAMERA >
REGISTRATION to search to view the IP camera is online or not. Or you can go to the Main
Menu > CAMERA INFO > NETWORK > Network Test, you can input IP camera IP address
and then click the Test button to check you can connect to the IP camera or not.
● Check IP channel setup is right or not (such as IP address, manufacturer, port, username,
password, and remote channel number).

Daily Maintenance
● Use the brush to clean the board, socket connector and the chassis regularly.
● The device shall be soundly earthed in case there is audio/video disturbance. Keep the device
away from the static voltage or induced voltage.
● Unplug the power cable before you remove the audio/video signal cable, RS-232 or RS-485 cable.
● Do not connect the TV to the local video output port (VOUT). It might result in video output
circuit.
● Always shut down the device properly. Please use the shutdown function in the menu, or you can
press the power button in the front panel for at least three seconds to shut down the device.
Otherwise it might result in HDD malfunction.
● Make sure the device is away from the direct sunlight or other heating sources. Please keep the
sound ventilation.
● Check and maintain the device regularly.

340
 User's Manual

Appendix 1 Glossary

The abbreviations in this glossary are related to the Manual.

Appendix Table 1-1 Glossary

Abbreviations Full term
BNC Bayonet Nut Connector
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CIF Common Intermediate Format
DDNS Dynamic Domain Name Service
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNS Domain Name System
DST Daylight Saving Time
DVR Digital Video Recorder
FTP File Transfer Protocol
HDD Hard Disk Drive
HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
IoT Internet of Things
IP Internet Protocol
IVS Intelligent Video System
LAN Local Area Network
MAC Media Access Control
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
NTP Network Time Protocol
NTSC National Television Standards Committee
ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
PAL Phase Alteration Line
PAT Port Address Translation
POS Point of Sale
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PSS Professional Surveillance Software
PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom
RCA Radio Corporation of American
RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol
S.M.A.R.T Self-Monitoring-Analysis and Reporting Technology
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment

341
 User's Manual

Abbreviations Full term

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UPnP Universal Plug and Play
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VGA Video Graphics Array
WAN Wide Area Network

342
 User's Manual

Appendix 2 HDD Capacity Calculation

Calculate total capacity needed by each DVR according to video recording (video recording type and
video file storage time).

Procedure
Step 1 According to Formula (1) to calculate storage capacity that is the capacity of each channel
needed for each hour, unit MB.

In the formula: means the bit rate, unit Kbit/s

Step 2 After video time requirement is confirmed, according to Formula (2) to calculate the
storage capacity, which is storage of each channel needed unit MB.

In the formula:
● means the recording time for each day (hour)
● means number of days for which the video shall be kept
Step 3 According to Formula (3) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all
channels in the DVR during scheduled video recording.

In the formula: means total number of channels in one DVR.

Step 4 According to Formula (4) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for
all channels in DVR during alarm video recording (including motion detection).

In the formula: means alarm occurrence rate.

You can refer to the following table for the file size in one hour per channel. (All the data
listed below are for reference only.)

Appendix Table 2-1 HDD capacity calculation

Bit Stream Size Bit Stream Size
File Size File Size
(max) (max)
96 Kbps 42 MB 128 Kbps 56 MB
160 Kbps 70 MB 192 Kbps 84 MB
224 Kbps 98 MB 256 Kbps 112 MB
320 Kbps 140 MB 384 Kbps 168 MB
448 Kbps 196 MB 512 Kbps 225 MB
640 Kbps 281 MB 768 Kbps 337 MB
896 Kbps 393 MB 1024 Kbps 450 MB
1280 Kbps 562 MB 1536 Kbps 675 MB
1792 Kbps 787 MB 2048 Kbps 900 MB

343
 User's Manual

Appendix 3 Compatible Backup Devices

Appendix 3.1 Compatible USB List

Appendix Table 3-1 Compatible USB
Manufacturer Model Capacity
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 512 MB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 1 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 2 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 256 MB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 512 MB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 1 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 2 GB
Kingston DataTravelerII 1 GB
Kingston DataTravelerII 2 GB
Kingston DataTraveler 1 GB
Kingston DataTraveler 2 GB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 128 MB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 256 MB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 512 MB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 1 GB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 2 GB
Kingax Super Stick 128 MB
Kingax Super Stick 256 MB
Kingax Super Stick 512 MB
Kingax Super Stick 1 GB
Kingax Super Stick 2 GB
Netac U210 128 MB
Netac U210 256 MB
Netac U210 512 MB
Netac U210 1 GB
Netac U210 2 GB
Netac U208 4 GB
Teclast Ti Cool 128 MB
Teclast Ti Cool 256 MB
Teclast Ti Cool 512 MB

344
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Model Capacity

Teclast Ti Cool 1 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 2 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 8 GB
Sandisk Ti Cool 2 GB
Sandisk Hongjiao 4 GB
Lexar Lexar 256 MB
Kingston Data Traveler 1 GB
Kingston Data Traveler 16 GB
Kingston Data Traveler 32 GB
Aigo L8315 16 GB
Sandisk 250 16 GB
Kingston Data Traveler Locker+ 32 GB
Netac U228 8 GB

Appendix 3.2 Compatible SD Card List

Appendix Table 3-2 Compatible SD card
Manufacturer Standard Capacity Card type
Transcend SDHC6 16 GB Big
Kingston SDHC4 4 GB Big
Kingston SD 2 GB Big
Kingston SD 1 GB Big
Sandisk SDHC2 8 GB Small
Sandisk SD 1 GB Small

Appendix 3.3 Compatible Portable HDD List

Appendix Table 3-3 Compatible portable HDD
Manufacturer Model Capacity
YDStar YDstar HDD box 40 GB
Netac Netac 80 GB
Iomega RPHD-CG"
Iomega 250 GB
RNAJ50U287
WD Elements WCAVY1205901 1.5 TB
Newsmy Liangjian 320 GB
WD Elements WDBAAR5000ABK-00 500 GB

345
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Model Capacity

WD Elements WDBAAU0015HBK-00 1.5 TB
Seagate FreeAgent Go(ST905003F) 500 GB
Aigo H8169 500 GB

Appendix 3.4 Compatible USB DVD List

Appendix Table 3-4 Compatible USB DVD
Manufacturer Model
Samsung SE-S084
BenQ LD2000-2K4

Appendix 3.5 Compatible SATA DVD List

Manufacturer Model
LG GH22NS30
Samsung TS-H653 Ver.A
Samsung TS-H653 Ver.F
Samsung SH-224BB/CHXH
SONY DRU-V200S
SONY DRU-845S
SONY AW-G170S
Pioneer DVR-217CH

Appendix 3.6 Compatible SATA HDD List

Please upgrade the DVR firmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below. Here
we recommend HDD of 500 GB to 4 TB capacity.

Appendix Table 3-5 Compatible SATA HDD

Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
Seagate Video 3.5 ST1000VM002 1 TB SATA
Seagate Video 3.5 ST2000VM003 2 TB SATA
Seagate Video 3.5 ST3000VM002 3 TB SATA
Seagate Video 3.5 ST4000VM000 4 TB SATA
Seagate SV35 ST1000VX000 1 TB SATA

346
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode

Seagate SV35 ST2000VX000 2 TB SATA
Seagate SV35 ST3000VX000 3 TB SATA
SV35 (Support
HDD data
Seagate ST1000VX002 1 TB SATA
recovery offered
by Seagate)
SV35 (Support
HDD data
Seagate ST2000VX004 2 TB SATA
recovery offered
by Seagate)
SV35 (Support
HDD data
Seagate ST3000VX004 3 TB SATA
recovery offered
by Seagate)
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST1000VX001 1 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST1000VX005 1 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST2000VX003 2 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST2000VX008 2 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST3000VX006 3 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST3000VX010 3 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST4000VX000 4 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST4000VX007 4 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST5000VX0001 5 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST6000VX0001 6 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST6000VX0023 6 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST6000VX0003 6 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST8000VX0002 8 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST8000VX0022 8 TB SATA
ST100000VX000
Seagate SkyHawk HDD 10 TB SATA
4
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
Seagate data recovery ST1000VX003 1 TB SATA
offered by
Seagate)
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
Seagate data recovery ST2000VX005 2 TB SATA
offered by
Seagate)

347
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode

SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
Seagate data recovery ST3000VX005 3 TB SATA
offered by
Seagate)
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
Seagate data recovery ST4000VX002 4 TB SATA
offered by
Seagate)
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
Seagate data recovery ST5000VX0011 5 TB SATA
offered by
Seagate)
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
Seagate data recovery ST6000VX0011 6 TB SATA
offered by
Seagate)
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
Seagate data recovery ST8000VX0012 8 TB SATA
offered by
Seagate)
WD10EURX
WD WD Green 1 TB SATA
(EOL)
WD20EURX
WD WD Green 2 TB SATA
(EOL)
WD30EURX
WD WD Green 3 TB SATA
(EOL)
WD40EURX
WD WD Green 4 TB SATA
(EOL)
WD WD Purple WD10PURX 1 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD20PURX 2 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD30PURX 3 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD40PURX 4 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD50PURX 5 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD60PURX 6 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD80PUZX 8 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD10PURZ 1 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD20PURZ 2 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD30PURZ 3 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD40PURZ 4 TB SATA

348
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode

WD WD Green WD50PURZ 5 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD60PURZ 6 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD80PURZ 8 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD4NPURX 4 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD6NPURX 6 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Mars DT01ABA100V 1 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Mars DT01ABA200V 2 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Mars DT01ABA300V 3 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD03ACA200V 2 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD03ACA300V 3 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD03ACA400V 4 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD04ABA400V 4 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD04ABA500V 5 TB SATA
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST1000NM0033 1 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST2000NM0033 2 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST3000NM0033 3 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST4000NM0033 4 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST1000NM0055 1 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST2000NM0055 2 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST3000NM0005 3 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST4000NM0035 4 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST6000NM0115 6 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST8000NM0055 8 TB SATA
interface)

349
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode

Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST10000NM0016 10 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST4000NM0024 4 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SATA ST6000NM0024 6 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST1000NM0023 1 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST2000NM0023 2 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST3000NM0023 3 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST4000NM0023 4 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST6000NM0014 6 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST1000NM0045 1 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST2000NM0045 2 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST3000NM0025 3 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST4000NM0025 4 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST6000NM0095 6 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST6000NM0034 6 TB SATA
interface)
Constellation ES
Seagate series (SAS ST8000NM0075 8 TB SATA
interface)

350
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode

WD RE series
WD WD1003FBYZ 1 TB SATA
(SATA interface)
WD1004FBYZ
WD RE series
WD (replace 1 TB SATA
(SATA interface)
WD1003FBYZ)
WD RE series
WD WD2000FYYZ 2 TB SATA
(SATA interface)
WD2004FBYZ(re
WD RE series
WD place 2 TB SATA
(SATA interface)
WD2000FYYZ)
WD RE series
WD WD3000FYYZ 3 TB SATA
(SATA interface)
WD RE series
WD WD4000FYYZ 4 TB SATA
(SATA interface)
WD (SATA
WD WD2000F9YZ 2 TB SATA
interface)
WD (SATA
WD WD3000F9YZ 3 TB SATA
interface)
WD (SATA
WD WD4000F9YZ 4 TB SATA
interface)
WD (SATA
WD WD4002FYYZ 4 TB SATA
interface)
WD (SATA
WD WD6001FSYZ 6 TB SATA
interface)
WD (SATA
WD WD6002FRYZ 6 TB SATA
interface)
WD (SATA
WD WD8002FRYZ 8 TB SATA
interface)
Ultrastar series HUS724030ALA
HITACHI 3 TB SATA
(SATA interface) 640
Ultrastar series HUS726060ALE6
HITACHI 6 TB SATA
(SATA interface) 10
Ultrastar series HUH728060ALE
HITACHI 6 TB SATA
(SATA interface) 600
Ultrastar series HUH728080ALE
HITACHI 8 TB SATA
(SATA interface) 600
Ultrastar series HUS726020AL52
HITACHI 2 TB SATA
(SAS interface) 10
Ultrastar series HUS726040AL52
HITACHI 4 TB SATA
(SAS interface) 10
Ultrastar series HUS726060AL52
HITACHI 6 TB SATA
(SAS interface) 10
Seagate Pipeline HD Mini ST320VT000 320 GB SATA

351
 User's Manual

Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode

Seagate Pipeline HD Mini ST500VT000 500 GB SATA
ST2000LM003
Seagate Pipeline HD Mini 2 TB SATA
(EOL)
2.5-inch PC
TOSHIBA MQ01ABD050V 500 GB SATA
series
2.5-inch PC
TOSHIBA MQ01ABD100V 1 TB SATA
series
HN-M101MBB
SAMSUNG HN-M101MBB 1 TB SATA
(EOL)
2.5-inch
Seagate ST1000NX0313 1 TB SATA
enterprise series
2.5-inch
Seagate ST2000NX0253 1 TB SATA
enterprise series

352
 User's Manual

Appendix 4 Compatible CD/DVD Burner List

Upgrade the DVR firmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below. And you can
use the USB cable with the model recommended to set USB burner.

Appendix Table 4-1 Compatible CD/DVD burner

Manufacturer Model Port Type Type
Sony DRX-S50U USB DVD-RW
Sony DRX-S70U USB DVD-RW
Sony AW-G170S SATA DVD-RW
Samsung TS-H653A SATA DVD-RW
Panasonic SW-9588-C SATA DVD-RW
Sony DRX-S50U USB DVD-RW
BenQ 5232WI USB DVD-RW

353
 User's Manual

Appendix 5 Compatible Displayer List

Please refer to the following table form compatible displayer list.

Appendix Table 5-1 Compatible displayer

Brand Model Dimension (Unit: inch)
BENQ (LCD) ET-0007-TA 19-inch (wide screen)
DELL (LCD) E178FPc 17-inch
Q7T4 17-inch
BENQ (LCD)
Q7T3 17-inch
HFNOVO (LCD) LXB-L17C 17-inch
SANGSUNG (LCD) 225BW 22-inch (wide screen)
HFNOVO (CRT) LXB-FD17069HB 17-inch
HFNOVO (CRT) LXB-HF769A 17-inch
HFNOVO(CRT) LX-GJ556D 17-inch
Samsung (LCD) 2494HS 24-inch
Samsung (LCD) P2350 23-inch
Samsung (LCD) P2250 22-inch
Samsung (LCD) P2370G 23-inch
Samsung (LCD) 2043 20-inch
Samsung (LCD) 2243EW 22-inch
Samsung (LCD) SMT-1922P 19-inch
Samsung (LCD) T190 19-inch
Samsung (LCD) T240 24-inch
LG (LCD) W1942SP 19-inch
LG (LCD) W2243S 22-inch
LG (LCD) W2343T 23-inch
BENQ (LCD) G900HD 18.5-inch
BENQ (LCD) G2220HD 22-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 230E 23-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 220CW9 23-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 220BW9 24-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 220EW9 25-inch

354
 User's Manual

Appendix 6 Compatible Switcher

Appendix Table 6-1 Compatible switcher

Brand Model network working mode
D-LinK DES-1016D 10/100M self-adaptive
D-LinK DES-1008D 10/100M self-adaptive
Five network modes:
● AUTO
● HALF-10M
Ruijie RG-S1926S
● FULL-10M
● HALF-100M
● FULL-100M
H3C H3C-S1024 10/100M self-adaptive
TP-LINK TL-SF1016 10/100M self-adaptive
TP-LINK TL-SF1008+ 10/100M self-adaptive

355
 User's Manual

Appendix 7 Earthing

Appendix 7.1 What is the Surge

Surge is a short current or voltage change during a very short time. In the circuit, it lasts for
microsecond. In a 220 V circuit, the 5KV or 10KV voltage change during a very short time (about
microseconds) can be called a surge. The surge comes from two ways: external surge and internal
surge.
● The external surge: The external surge mainly comes from the thunder lightning. Or it comes
from the voltage change during the on/off operation in the electric power cable.
● The internal surge: The research finds 88% of the surge from the low voltage comes from the
internal of the building such as the air conditioning, elevator, electric welding, air compressor,
water pump, power button, duplicating machine and other device of inductive load.
The lightning surge is far above the load level the PC or the micro devices can support. In most cases,
the surge can result in electric device chip damage, PC error code, accelerating the part aging, data
loss and etc. Even when a small 20 horsepower inductive engine boots up or stops, the surge can
reach 3000 V to 5000 V, which can adversely affect the electronic devices that use the same
distribution box.
To protect the device, you need to evaluate its environment, the lightning affection degree
objectively. Because surge has close relationship with the voltage amplitude, frequency, network
structure, device voltage-resistance, protection level, ground and etc. The thunder proof work shall
be a systematic project, emphasizing the all-round protection (including building, transmission
cable, device, ground and etc.). There shall be comprehensive management and the measures shall
be scientific, reliable, practical and economic. Considering the high voltage during the inductive
thundering, the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard on the energy absorbing
step by step theory and magnitude classification in the protection zone, you need to prepare
multiple precaution levels.
You can use the lightning rod, lightning strap or the lightning net to reduce the damage to the
building, personal injury or the property.
The lightning protection device can be divided into three types:
● Power lightning arrester: There are 220 V single-phrase lightning arrester and 380 V three-phrase
lightning arrester (mainly in parallel connection, sometimes use series connection) You can
parallel connect the power lightning arrester in the electric cable to reduce the short-time
voltage change and release the surge current. From the BUS to the device, there are usually three
levels so that system can reduce the voltage and release the current step by step to remove the
thunderstorm energy and guarantee the device safety. You can select the replaceable module
type, the terminal connection type and portable socket according to your requirement.
● Signal lightning arrester: This device is mainly used in the PC network, communication system.
The connection type is serial connection. Once you connected the signal lightning arrestor with
the signal port, it can cut the channel of the thunderstorm to the device, and on the other hand,
it can discharge the current to the ground to guarantee the device proper work. The signal
lightning arrester has many specifications, and widely used in many devices such as telephone,
network, analog communication, digital communication, cable TV and satellite antenna. For all

356
 User's Manual
the input port, especially those from the outdoor, you need to install the signal lightning arrester.
● Antenna feed cable lightning arrester: It is suitable for antenna system of the transmitter or the
device system to receive the wireless signal. It uses the serial connection too.
Please note, when you select the lightning arrester, please pay attention to the port type and the
earthing reliability. In some important environment, you need to use special shielded cable. Do not
parallel connect the thunder proof ground cable with the ground cable of the lightning rod. Please
make sure they are far enough and grounded respectively.

Appendix 7.2 The Earthing Modes

We all know the earthing is the most complicated technology in the electromagnetism compatibility
design since there is no systematic theory or module. The earthing has many modes, but the
selection depends on the system structure and performance.
The following are some successfully experience from our past work.
● One-point ground: In the following figure you can see there is a one-point ground. This
connection provides common point to allow signal to be transmitted in many circuits. If there is
no common point, the error signal transmission occurred. In the one-point ground mode, each
circuit is just grounded only and they are connected at the same point. Since there is only one
common point, there is no circuit and so, there is no interference.

Appendix Figure 7-1 One-point ground

● Multiple-point ground: In the following figure, you can see the internal circuit uses the chassis
as the common point. While at the same time, all devices chassis use the earthing as the common
point. In this connection, the ground structure can provide the lower ground resistance because
when there are multiple-point grounds; each ground cable is as short as possible. And the
parallel cable connection can reduce the total conductance of the ground conductor. In the high-
frequency circuit, you need to use the multiple-point ground mode and each cable needs to
connect to the ground. The length shall be less than the 1/20 of the signal wavelength.

357
 User's Manual
Appendix Figure 7-2 Multiple-point ground

● Mixed ground: The mix ground consists of the feature of the one-point ground and multiple-
point ground. For example, the power in the system needs to use the one-point ground mode
while the radio frequency signal requires the multiple-point ground. So, you can use the
following figure to earth. For the direct current (DC), the capacitance is open circuit and the
circuit is one-point ground. For the radio frequency signal, the capacitance is conducive and the
circuit adopts multiple-point ground.

Appendix Figure 7-3 Mixed ground

When connecting devices of huge size (the device physical dimension and connection cable is big
comparing with the wave path of existed interference), then there is possibility of interference when
the current goes through the chassis and cable. In this situation, the interference circuit path usually
lies in the system ground circuit.
When considering the earthing, you need to think about two aspects: One is the system
compatibility, and the other is the external interference coupling into the earth circuit, which results
in system error. For the external interference is not regular, it is not easy to resolve.

Appendix 7.3 Thunder Proof Ground Method in the Monitor

System
● The monitor system shall have sound thunder proof earthing to guarantee personnel safety and
device safety.

358
 User's Manual
● The monitor system working ground resistance shall be less than 1 Ω.
● The thunder proof ground shall adopt the special ground cable from the monitor control room to
the ground object. The ground cable adopts copper insulation cable or wire and its ground
section shall be more than 20mm2.
● The ground cable of the monitor system cannot short circuit or mixed connected with the strong
alternative current cable.
● For all the ground cables from the control room to the monitor system or ground cable of other
monitor devices, please use the copper resistance soft cable and its section shall be more than 4
mm2.
● The monitor system usually can adopt the one-point ground.
● Connect the ground end of 3-pin socket in the monitor system to the ground port of the system
(protection ground cable)

Appendix 7.4 The Shortcut Way to Check the Electric System

by Digital Multimeter
For 220 VAC socket, from the top to the bottom, E (ground cable), N (neutral cable), L (live cable).
Please refer to the following figure.

Appendix Figure 7-4 Socket

There is a shortcut way to check whether these three cables connection are standard or not (not the
accurate check).

In the following operations, the multimeter range shall be at 750 V.

For E (earth cable)

Turn the digital multimeter to 750 VAC, use your one hand to hold the metal end, and then the other
hand inserts the pen to the E port of the socket. See the following figure. If the multimeter shows 0,
then you can see current earth cable connection is standard. If the value is more than 10, then you
can know there is inductive current and the earth cable connection is not proper.

359
 User's Manual
Appendix Figure 7-5 Check earth cable connection

For L (live cable)

Turn the digital multimeter to 750 VAC, use your one hand to hold the metal end, and then the other
hand inserts the pen to the L port of the socket. See the following figure. If the multimeter shows
125, then you can see current live cable connection is standard. If the value is less than 60, then you
can know current live cable connection is not proper or it is not the live cable at all.

360
 User's Manual
Appendix Figure 7-6 Check live cable connection

For N (Neutral cable)

Turn the digital multimeter to 750 VAC, use your one hand to hold the metal end, and then the other
hand inserts the pen to the N port of the socket. See the following figure. If the multimeter shows 0,
then you can see current N cable connection is standard. If the value is more than 10, then you can
see there is inductive current and the neutral cable connection is not proper. If the value is 120, then
you can know that you have misconnected the neutral cable to the live cable.

361
 User's Manual
Appendix Figure 7-7 Check neutral cable connection

362
 User's Manual

Appendix 8 RJ45-RS232 Connection Cable

Definition

Refer to the following figure for RJ-45 cable definition.

Appendix Figure 8-1 RJ-45

Refer to the following figure for RS-232 pin definition.

Appendix Figure 8-2 RS-232

Cross Connection
Refer to the following figure for connection information.

Appendix Figure 8-3 Cross connection

363
 User's Manual
Refer to the following table for detailed crossover cable connection information.

Appendix Table 8-1 Crossover cable connection

RJ-45 (Network
RJ-45 (T568B) RS-232 Signal Description
cable)
4 Blue 2 RXD
5 White and blue 3 TXD
3 White and green 5 GND

Straight Connection
Please refer to the following figure for straight cable connection information.

Appendix Figure 8-4 Straight cable connection

Refer to the following table for straight connection information.

Appendix Table 8-2 Straight connection

RJ-45 (Network
RJ-45 (T568B) RS-232 Signal Description
cable)
4 Blue 3 RXD
5 White and blue 2 TXD
3 White and green 5 GND

364
 User's Manual

Appendix 9 Cybersecurity Recommendations

Cybersecurity is more than just a buzzword: it’s something that pertains to every device that is
connected to the internet. IP video surveillance is not immune to cyber risks, but taking basic steps
toward protecting and strengthening networks and networked appliances will make them less
susceptible to attacks. Below are some tips and recommendations from Dahua on how to create a
more secured security system.
Mandatory actions to be taken for basic device network security:
1. Use Strong Passwords
Please refer to the following suggestions to set passwords:
● The length should not be less than 8 characters.
● Include at least two types of characters; character types include upper and lower case letters,
numbers and symbols.
● Do not contain the account name or the account name in reverse order.
● Do not use continuous characters, such as 123, abc, etc.
● Do not use overlapped characters, such as 111, aaa, etc.
2. Update Firmware and Client Software in Time
● According to the standard procedure in Tech-industry, we recommend to keep your device
(such as NVR, DVR, IP camera, etc.) firmware up-to-date to ensure the system is equipped with
the latest security patches and fixes. When the device is connected to the public network, it is
recommended to enable the“auto-check for updates” function to obtain timely information
of firmware updates released by the manufacturer.
● We suggest that you download and use the latest version of client software.
"Nice to have" recommendations to improve your device network security:
1. Physical Protection
We suggest that you perform physical protection to device, especially storage devices. For
example, place the device in a special computer room and cabinet, and implement well-done
access control permission and key management to prevent unauthorized personnel from
carrying out physical contacts such as damaging hardware, unauthorized connection of
removable device (such as USB flash disk, serial port), etc.
2. Change Passwords Regularly
We suggest that you change passwords regularly to reduce the risk of being guessed or cracked.
3. Set and Update Passwords Reset Information Timely
The device supports password reset function. Please set up related information for password
reset in time, including the end user’s mailbox and password protection questions. If the
information changes, please modify it in time. When setting password protection questions, it is
suggested not to use those that can be easily guessed.
4. Enable Account Lock
The account lock feature is enabled by default, and we recommend you to keep it on to
guarantee the account security. If an attacker attempts to log in with the wrong password several
times, the corresponding account and the source IP address will be locked.
5. Change Default HTTP and Other Service Ports
We suggest you to change default HTTP and other service ports into any set of numbers between

365
 User's Manual
1024–65535, reducing the risk of outsiders being able to guess which ports you are using.
6. Enable HTTPS
We suggest you to enable HTTPS, so that you visit Web service through a secure communication
channel.
7. MAC Address Binding
We recommend you to bind the IP and MAC address of the gateway to the device, thus reducing
the risk of ARP spoofing.
8. Assign Accounts and Privileges Reasonably
According to business and management requirements, reasonably add users and assign a
minimum set of permissions to them.
9. Disable Unnecessary Services and Choose Secure Modes
If not needed, it is recommended to turn off some services such as SNMP, SMTP, UPnP, etc., to
reduce risks.
If necessary, it is highly recommended that you use safe modes, including but not limited to the
following services:
● SNMP: Choose SNMP v3, and set up strong encryption passwords and authentication
passwords.
● SMTP: Choose TLS to access mailbox server.
● FTP: Choose SFTP, and set up strong passwords.
● AP hotspot: Choose WPA2-PSK encryption mode, and set up strong passwords.
10. Audio and Video Encrypted Transmission
If your audio and video data contents are very important or sensitive, we recommend that you
use encrypted transmission function, to reduce the risk of audio and video data being stolen
during transmission.
Reminder: encrypted transmission will cause some loss in transmission efficiency.
11. Secure Auditing
● Check online users: we suggest that you check online users regularly to see if the device is
logged in without authorization.
● Check device log: By viewing the logs, you can know the IP addresses that were used to log in
to your devices and their key operations.
12. Network Log
Due to the limited storage capacity of the device, the stored log is limited. If you need to save the
log for a long time, it is recommended that you enable the network log function to ensure that
the critical logs are synchronized to the network log server for tracing.
13. Construct a Safe Network Environment
In order to better ensure the safety of device and reduce potential cyber risks, we recommend:
● Disable the port mapping function of the router to avoid direct access to the intranet devices
from external network.
● The network should be partitioned and isolated according to the actual network needs. If
there are no communication requirements between two sub networks, it is suggested to use
VLAN, network GAP and other technologies to partition the network, so as to achieve the
network isolation effect.
● Establish the 802.1x access authentication system to reduce the risk of unauthorized access to
private networks.
● Enable IP/MAC address filtering function to limit the range of hosts allowed to access the

366
 User's Manual
device.

More information
Please visit Dahua official website security emergency response center for security announcements
and the latest security recommendations.

367
User's Manual